"Fossies" - the Fresh Open Source Software Archive

Member "emacs-25.3/doc/misc/mh-e.texi" (14 Apr 2017, 323639 Bytes) of package /linux/misc/emacs-25.3.tar.xz:


Caution: As a special service "Fossies" has tried to format the requested Texinfo source page into HTML format but that may be not always succeeeded perfectly. Alternatively you can here view or download the uninterpreted Texinfo source code. A member file download can also be achieved by clicking within a package contents listing on the according byte size field. See also the last Fossies "Diffs" side-by-side code changes report for "mh-e.texi": 25.1_vs_25.2.

The MH-E Manual

Version 8.6

April, 2016

Bill Wohler

This is version 8.6 of The MH-E Manual, last updated 2016-04-29.

Copyright © 1995, 2001–2003, 2005–2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of either:

  1. the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover Texts being “A GNU Manual,” and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License.”

    (a) The FSF’s Back-Cover Text is: “You have the freedom to copy and modify this GNU manual.”

  2. the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU General Public License.”

This is version 8.6 of The MH-E Manual, last updated 2016-04-29.

Copyright © 1995, 2001–2003, 2005–2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of either:

  1. the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover Texts being “A GNU Manual,” and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License.”

    (a) The FSF’s Back-Cover Text is: “You have the freedom to copy and modify this GNU manual.”

  2. the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU General Public License.”

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

Preface

This manual introduces another interface to the MH mail system that is accessible through the GNU Emacs editor, namely, MH-E. MH-E is easy to use. I don’t assume that you know GNU Emacs or even MH at this point, since I didn’t know either of them when I discovered MH-E. However, MH-E was the tip of the iceberg, and I discovered more and more niceties about GNU Emacs and MH. Now I’m fully hooked on both of them.

The MH-E package is distributed with Emacs(1), so you shouldn’t have to do anything special to use it. Gnus is also required; version 5.10 or higher is recommended. This manual covers MH-E version 8.6. To help you decide which version you have, see Getting Started.

If you don’t already use GNU Emacs but want to learn more, you can read a built-in tutorial by starting GNU Emacs and typing C-h t (help-with-tutorial). (To learn about this notation, see GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions.) If you want to take the plunge, consult the GNU Emacs Manual, from the Free Software Foundation.

If more information is needed, you can go to the Unix manual pages of the individual MH commands. When the name is not obvious, I’ll guide you to a relevant MH manual page that describes the action more fully.

This manual is available in both Info and online formats. The Info version is distributed with Emacs and can be accessed with the info command (‘info mh-e’) or within Emacs (C-h i m mh-e <RET>). The online version is available at SourceForge. Another great online resource is the book MH & nmh: Email for Users & Programmers (also known as the MH book).

I hope you enjoy this manual! If you have any comments, or suggestions for this document, please let me know.

Bill Wohler <wohler at newt.com>
8 February 1995
24 February 2006


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions

If you’re an experienced Emacs user, you can skip the following conventions and definition of terms and go directly to the next section (see section Getting Started).

In general, functions in this text refer to Emacs Lisp functions that one would call from within Emacs Lisp programs (for example, (mh-inc-folder)). On the other hand, commands are those things that are run by the user, such as i or M-x mh-inc-folder. Programs outside of Emacs are specifically called MH commands, shell commands, or Unix commands.

The conventions for key names are as follows:

C-x

Hold down the <CTRL> (Control) key and press the x key.

M-x

Hold down the <META> or <ALT> key and press the x key.

Since some keyboards don’t have a <META> key, you can generate M-x, for example, by pressing <ESC> (Escape), releasing it, and then pressing the x key.

<RET>

Press the <RETURN> or <ENTER> key. This is normally used to complete a command.

<SPC>

Press the space bar.

<TAB>

Press the <TAB> key.

<DEL>

Press the <DELETE> key.

<BS>

Press the <BACKSPACE> key(2).

A prefix argument allows you to pass an argument to any Emacs function. To pass an argument, type C-u before the Emacs command or keystroke. Numeric arguments can be passed as well. For example, to insert five f’s, use C-u 5 f. There is a default of four when using C-u, and you can use multiple prefix arguments to provide arguments of powers of four. To continue our example, you could insert four f’s with C-u f, 16 f’s with C-u C-u f, 64 f’s with C-u C-u C-u f, and so on. Numeric and valueless negative arguments can also be inserted with the <META> key. Examples include M-5 to specify an argument of 5, or M-- which specifies a negative argument with no particular value.


NOTE

The prefix C-u or M- is not necessary in MH-E’s MH-Folder mode (see section Receiving Mail). In this mode, simply enter the numerical argument before entering the command.


Emacs uses variables to hold values. These can be changed via calls to the function setq in ‘~/.emacs’.

Variables in MH-E that are normally modified by the user are called options and are modified through the customize functions (such as M-x customize-option or M-x customize-group). See section Easy Customization in The GNU Emacs Manual. See section Options.

You can specify various styles for displaying text using faces. MH-E provides a set of faces that you can use to personalize the look of your MH-E buffers. Use the command M-x customize-face to do this. See section Face Customization in The GNU Emacs Manual.

Commands often offer hooks which enable you to extend or modify the way a command works. See section Hooks in The GNU Emacs Manual for a description about normal hooks and abnormal hooks. MH-E uses normal hooks in nearly all cases, so you can assume that we are talking about normal hooks unless we explicitly mention that a hook is abnormal. We also follow the conventions described in that section: the name of the abnormal hooks end in -functions and all the rest of the MH-E hooks end in -hook. You can add hooks with either customize-option or add-hook.

There are several other terms that are used in Emacs that you should know. The point is where the cursor currently is. You can save your current place in the file by setting a mark. This operation is useful in several ways. The mark can be later used when defining a region, which is the text between the point and mark. Many commands operate on regions, such as those for deleting text or filling paragraphs. A mark can be set with C-@ (or C-<SPC>).

The minibuffer is the bottom line of the Emacs window, where all prompting and multiple-character input is directed. You can use completion to enter values such as folders. Completion means that Emacs fills in text for you when you type <SPC> or <TAB>. A second <SPC> or <TAB> will list all possibilities at that point. See the section Completion in The GNU Emacs Manual. Note that <SPC> cannot be used for completing filenames and folders.

The minibuffer is also where you enter Emacs function names after typing M-x. For example, in the preface, I mentioned that you could obtain help with C-h t (help-with-tutorial). What this means is that you can get a tutorial by typing either C-h t or M-x help-with-tutorial. In the latter case, you are prompted for ‘help-with-tutorial’ in the minibuffer after typing M-x.

The ‘~’ notation in filenames represents your home directory. This notation is used by many shells including bash, tcsh, and csh. It is analogous to the environment variable ‘$HOME’. For example, ‘~/.emacs’ can be written ‘$HOME/.emacs’ or using the absolute path as in ‘/home/wohler/.emacs’ instead.

In case of trouble: Emacs can be interrupted at any time with C-g. For example, if you’ve started a command that requests that you enter something in the minibuffer, but then you change your mind, type C-g and you’ll be back where you started. If you want to exit Emacs entirely, use C-x C-c.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

2 Getting Started

Because there are many old versions of MH-E out there, it is important to know which version you have. I’ll be talking about Version 8 which is pretty close to Version 6 and Version 7. It differs from Version 4 and Version 5 and is vastly different from Version 3. See section History of MH-E.

To determine which version of MH-E that you have, enter M-x mh-version <RET>. Hopefully it says that you’re running Version 8.6 which is the latest version as of this printing.

If your version is much older than this, please consider upgrading. You can have your system administrator upgrade the system-wide version, or you can install your own personal version. It’s really quite easy. See section Getting MH-E, for instructions for getting and installing MH-E.

If the mh-version command displays ‘No MH variant detected(3), then you need to install MH or tell MH-E where to find MH.

If you don’t have MH on your system already, you must install a variant of MH. The Debian mh-e package does this for you automatically (see section Getting MH-E). Most people use nmh, but you may be interested in trying out GNU mailutils MH, which supports IMAP. Your GNU/Linux distribution probably has packages for both of these.

If you’ve never run MH before, you need to run install-mh from the shell before you continue. This sets up your personal MH environment(4). If you don’t, you’ll be greeted with the error message: ‘Install MH and run install-mh before running MH-E’. This is all you need to know about MH to use MH-E, but the more you know about MH, the more you can leverage its power. See the MH book to learn more about MH.

Your MH environment includes your MH profile which is found in the file ‘~/.mh_profile’, or the file named in the environment variable ‘$MH’. This file contains a number of MH profile components. For example, the ‘Path:’ MH profile component contains the path to your mail directory, which is ‘~/Mail’ by default.

There are several options MH-E uses to interact with your MH installation. The option mh-variant specifies the variant used by MH-E (see section Options). The default setting of this option is ‘Auto-detect’ which means that MH-E will automatically choose the first of nmh, MH, or GNU mailutils MH that it finds in the directories listed in mh-path (which you can customize), mh-sys-path, and exec-path. If MH-E can’t find MH at all, you may have to customize mh-path and add the directory in which the command mhparam is located. If, on the other hand, you have both nmh and GNU mailutils MH installed (for example) and mh-variant-in-use was initialized to nmh but you want to use GNU mailutils MH, then you can set mh-variant to ‘gnu-mh’.

When mh-variant is changed, MH-E resets mh-progs, mh-lib, mh-lib-progs, mh-flists-present-flag, and mh-variant-in-use accordingly.


NOTE

Prior to version 8, it was often necessary to set some of these variables in ‘~/.emacs’; now it is no longer necessary and can actually cause problems.


In addition to setting variables that point to MH itself, MH-E also sets a handful of variables that point to where you keep your mail. During initialization, the function mh-find-path sets mh-user-path from your ‘Path:’ MH profile component (but defaults to ‘Mail’ if one isn’t present), mh-draft-folder from ‘Draft-Folder:’, mh-unseen-seq from ‘Unseen-Sequence:’, mh-previous-seq from ‘Previous-Sequence:’, and mh-inbox from ‘Inbox:’ (defaults to ‘+inbox’). The hook mh-find-path-hook is run after these variables have been set. This hook can be used the change the value of these variables if you need to run with different values between MH and MH-E.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

3 Tour Through MH-E

This chapter introduces some of the terms you’ll need to know and then takes you on a tour of MH-E(5). When you’re done, you’ll be able to send, read, and file mail, which is all that a lot of people ever do. But if you’re the curious or adventurous type, read the rest of the manual to be able to use all the features of MH-E. I suggest you read this chapter first to get the big picture, and then you can read the manual as you wish.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

3.1 Sending Mail

Let’s start our tour by sending ourselves a message which we can later read and process. Enter M-x mh-smail to invoke the MH-E program to send messages. Your message appears in an Emacs buffer whose mode(6) is MH-Letter.

Enter your login name in the ‘To:’ header field. Press the <TAB> twice to move the cursor past the ‘Cc:’ field, since no carbon copies are to be sent, and on to the ‘Subject:’ field. Enter Test or anything else that comes to mind.

Press <TAB> again to move the cursor to the body of the message. Enter some text, using normal Emacs commands. You should now have something like this(7):






--:--  *scratch*   All L1     (Lisp Interaction)-------------------------
To: wohler
cc:
Subject: Test
X-Mailer: MH-E 8.1; nmh 1.1; GNU Emacs 23.1
--------
This is a test message to get the wheels churning...#


--:**  {draft}   All L5     (MH-Letter)----------------------------------
Type C-c C-c to send message, C-C ? for help

MH-E message composition window

Note the line of dashes that separates the header and the body of the message. It is essential that these dashes (or a blank line) are present or the body of your message will be considered to be part of the header.

There are several commands specific to MH-Letter mode(8), but at this time we’ll only use C-c C-c to send your message. Type C-c C-c now. That’s all there is to it!


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

3.2 Receiving Mail

To read the mail you’ve just sent yourself, enter M-x mh-rmail. This incorporates the new mail and puts the output from inc(9) (called scan lines after the MH program scan(10) which prints a one-line summary of each message) into a buffer called ‘+inbox’ whose major mode is MH-Folder.


NOTE

The M-x mh-rmail command will show you only new mail, not mail you have already read. If you were to run this tour again, you would use F r to pull all your messages into MH-E.


You should see the scan line for your message, and perhaps others. Use n or p to move the cursor to your test message and type <RET> to read your message. You should see something like:

  3 t08/24 root       received fax files on Wed Aug 24 11:00:13 PDT 1
# 4+t08/24 To:wohler  Test<<This is a test message to get the wheels

-:%%  {+inbox/select} 4 msgs (1-4)   Bot L4     (MH-Folder Show)---------
To: wohler
Subject: Test
X-Mailer: MH-E 8.1; nmh 1.1; GNU Emacs 23.1
Date: Fri, 17 Mar 2006 10:49:11 -0800
From: Bill Wohler <wohler@stop.mail-abuse.org>

This is a test message to get the wheels churning...



--:--  {show-+inbox} 4   All L1     (MH-Show)----------------------------

After incorporating new messages

If you typed a long message, you can view subsequent pages with <SPC> and previous pages with <DEL>.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

3.3 Processing Mail

The first thing we want to do is reply to the message that we sent ourselves. Ensure that the cursor is still on the same line as your test message and type r. You are prompted in the minibuffer with ‘Reply to whom:’. Here MH-E is asking whether you’d like to reply to the original sender only, to the sender and primary recipients, or to the sender and all recipients. You can press <TAB> to see these choices. If you simply press <RET>, you’ll reply only to the sender. Press <RET> now.

You’ll find yourself in an Emacs buffer similar to that when you were sending the original message, like this:

To:
cc:
Subject: Re: Test
In-reply-to: <31054.1142621351@stop.mail-abuse.org>
References: <31054.1142621351@stop.mail-abuse.org>
Comments: In-reply-to Bill Wohler <wohler@stop.mail-abuse.org>
   message dated "Fri, 17 Mar 2006 10:49:11 -0800."
X-Mailer: MH-E 8.1; nmh 1.1; GNU Emacs 23.1
--------
#

--:--  {draft}  All L10     (MH-Letter)----------------------------------
To: wohler
Subject: Test
X-Mailer: MH-E 8.1; nmh 1.1; GNU Emacs 23.1
Date: Fri, 17 Mar 2006 10:49:11 -0800
From: Bill Wohler <wohler@stop.mail-abuse.org>

This is a test message to get the wheels churning...

--:--  {show-+inbox} 4   All L1     (MH-Show)----------------------------
Type C-c C-c to send message, C-c ? for help

Composition window during reply

By default, MH will not add you to the address list of your replies, so if you find that the ‘To:’ header field is missing, don’t worry. In this case, type C-c C-f C-t to create and go to the ‘To:’ field, where you can type your login name again. You can move around with the arrow keys or with C-p (previous-line), C-n (next-line), C-b (backward-char), and C-f (forward-char) and can delete the previous character with <BS>. When you’re finished editing your message, send it with C-c C-c as before.

You’ll often want to save messages that were sent to you in an organized fashion. This is done with folders. You can use folders to keep messages from your friends, or messages related to a particular topic. With your cursor in the MH-Folder buffer and positioned on the message you sent to yourself, type o to output (refile in MH parlance) that message to a folder. Enter test at the ‘Destination folder:’ prompt and type y (or <SPC>) when MH-E asks to create the folder ‘+test’. Note that a ‘^’ (caret) appears next to the message number, which means that the message has been marked for refiling but has not yet been refiled. We’ll talk about how the refile is actually carried out in a moment.

Your previous reply is now waiting in the system mailbox. You incorporate this mail into your MH-Folder buffer named ‘+inbox’ with the i command. Do this now. After the mail is incorporated, use n or p to move the cursor to the new message, and read it with <RET>. Let’s delete this message by typing d. Note that a ‘D’ appears next to the message number. This means that the message is marked for deletion but is not yet deleted. To perform the deletion (and the refile we did previously), use the x command.

If you want to send another message you can use m instead of M-x mh-smail. So go ahead, send some mail to your friends!

You can get a quick reminder about these commands by typing ?. This lists several prefix characters. To list the commands available via the prefix characters, type the prefix character followed by a ?, for example, F ?. More complete help is available with the C-h m (describe-mode) command.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

3.4 Leaving MH-E

You may now wish to exit emacs entirely. Use C-x C-c to exit emacs. If you exited without running x in the ‘+inbox’ buffer, Emacs will offer to save it for you. Type y or <SPC> to save ‘+inbox’ changes, which means to perform any refiles and deletes that you did there.

If you don’t want to leave Emacs, you can type q to bury (hide) the MH-E folder or delete it entirely with C-x k. You can then later recall it with C-x b or M-x mh-rmail.

On the other hand, if you no longer want to use MH and MH-E, you can take your mail with you. You can copy all of your mail into a single file, mbox-style, by using the MH command packf. For example, to create a file called ‘msgbox’ with the messages in your ‘+inbox’ folder, use ‘packf +inbox’. The packf command will append the messages to the file if it already exists, so you can use ‘folders -recurse -fast’ in a script to copy all of your messages into a single file, or using the ‘-file’ argument, a file for each folder.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

3.5 More About MH-E

These are the basic commands to get you going, but there are plenty more. If you think that MH-E is for you, read the rest of the manual to find out how you can:

Remember that you can also use MH commands when you’re not running MH-E (and when you are!).


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

4 Using This Manual

This chapter begins the meat of the manual which goes into more detail about every MH-E command and option.

There are many commands, but don’t get intimidated. There are command summaries at the beginning of each chapter. In case you have or would like to rebind the keys, the command summaries also list the associated Emacs Lisp function. Furthermore, even if you’re stranded on a desert island with a laptop and are without your manuals, you can get a summary of all these commands with GNU Emacs built-in help: use C-h m (describe-mode) for a brief summary of commands, ? (mh-help) for an even briefer summary(11) (C-c ? in MH-Letter mode), or C-h i to read this manual via Info. The built-in help is quite good; try running C-h C-h. This brings up a list of available help topics, one of which displays the documentation for a given key (like C-h k C-n). Another useful help feature is to view the manual section that describes a given key (such as C-h K i). In addition, review GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions, if any of the GNU Emacs conventions are strange to you.

In addition to all of the commands, it is also possible to reconfigure MH-E to fit the needs of even the most demanding user. The following chapters also describe all of the options, show the defaults, and make recommendations for customization.

However, when customizing your mail environment, first try to change what you want in MH, and only change MH-E if changing MH is not possible. That way you will get the same behavior inside and outside GNU Emacs. Note that MH-E does not provide hooks for customizations that can be done in MH; this omission is intentional.

I hope I’ve included enough examples here to get you well on your way. If you want to explore Emacs Lisp further, a programming manual does exist, (12) and you can look at the code itself for examples. Look in the Emacs Lisp directory on your system (such as ‘/usr/local/share/emacs/lisp/mh-e’) and find all the ‘mh-*.el’ files there. When calling MH-E and other Emacs Lisp functions directly from Emacs Lisp code, you’ll need to know the correct arguments. Use the built-in help for this. For example, try C-h f mh-execute-commands <RET>. If you write your own functions, please do not prefix your symbols (variables and functions) with ‘mh-’. This prefix is reserved for the MH-E package. To avoid conflicts with existing MH-E symbols, use a prefix like ‘my-’ or your initials. (Unless, of course, your initials happen to be mh!)


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

4.1 Options

Many string or integer options are easy to modify using M-x customize-option. For example, to modify the option that controls printing, you would run M-x customize-option <RET> mh-lpr-command-format <RET>. In the buffer that appears, modify the string to the right of the variable. For example, you may change the lpr command with ‘nenscript -G -r -2 -i'%s'’. Then use the ‘State’ combo box and select ‘Save for Future Sessions’. To read more about mh-lpr-command-format, see Printing Your Mail.

Options can also hold boolean values. In Emacs Lisp, the boolean values are nil, which means false, and t, which means true. The customize-option function makes it easy to change boolean values; simply click on the toggle button in the customize buffer to switch between ‘on’ (t) and ‘off’ (nil). For example, try setting mh-bury-show-buffer-flag to ‘off’ to keep the MH-Show buffer at the top of the buffer stack. Use the ‘State’ combo box and choose ‘Set for Current Session’ to see how the option affects the show buffer. Then choose the ‘Erase Customization’ menu item to reset the option to the default, which places the MH-Show buffer at the bottom of the buffer stack.

The text usually says to turn on an option by setting it to a non-nil value, because sometimes values other than ‘on’ are meaningful. An example of this is the variable mh-mhl-format-file (see section Viewing Your Mail). Other options, such as hooks, involve a little more Emacs Lisp programming expertise.

You can browse all of the MH-E options with the customize-group function. Try entering M-x customize-group <RET> mh <RET> to view the top-level options as well as buttons for all of the MH-E customization groups. Another way to view the MH-E customization group is to use M-x mh-customize <RET>.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

4.2 Ranges

Many commands that operate on individual messages, such as mh-forward or mh-refile-msg take a RANGE argument. This argument can be used in several ways.

If you provide the prefix argument C-u to these commands, then you will be prompted for the message range. This can be any valid MH range which can include messages, sequences (see section Using Sequences), and the abbreviations (described in the mh(1) man page):

<num1>-<num2>

Indicates all messages in the range <num1> to <num2>, inclusive. The range must be nonempty.

<num>:N
<num>:+N
<num>:-N

Up to N messages beginning with (or ending with) message num. Num may be any of the predefined symbols: first, prev, cur, next or last.

first:N
prev:N
next:N
last:N

The first, previous, next or last messages, if they exist.

all

All of the messages.

For example, a range that shows all of these things is ‘1 2 3 5-10 last:5 unseen’.

If the option transient-mark-mode is turned on and you set a region in the MH-Folder buffer, then the MH-E command will perform the operation on all messages in that region.

The ‘mh-range’ customization group contains a single option which affects how ranges are interpreted.

mh-interpret-number-as-range-flag

On means interpret a number as a range (default: ‘on’).

Since one of the most frequent ranges used is ‘last:N’, MH-E will interpret input such as ‘200’ as ‘last:200’ if the mh-interpret-number-as-range-flag option is on (which is the default). If you need to scan just the message 200, then use the range ‘200:1’ or ‘200-200’.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

4.3 Folder Selection

When you choose a folder in MH-E via a command such as o (mh-refile-msg), completion is used to enter the folder (see the section Completion in The GNU Emacs Manual). In addition, MH-E has several ways of choosing a suitable default so that the folder can often be selected with a single <RET> key.

The ‘mh-folder-selection’ customization group contains some options which are used to help with this.

mh-default-folder-for-message-function

Function to select a default folder for refiling or ‘Fcc:’ (default: nil).

mh-default-folder-list

List of addresses and folders (default: nil).

mh-default-folder-must-exist-flag

On means guessed folder name must exist to be used (default: ‘on’).

mh-default-folder-prefix

Prefix used for folder names generated from aliases (default: "").

You can set the option mh-default-folder-for-message-function to a function that provides a default folder for the message to be refiled. When this function is called, the current buffer contains the message being refiled and point is at the start of the message. This function should return the default folder as a string with a leading ‘+’ sign. It can also return nil so that the last folder name is used as the default, or an empty string to suppress the default entirely.

Otherwise, the name of the destination folder is derived from the sender as follows:

  1. The folder name associated with the first address found in the list mh-default-folder-list is used. Each element in this list contains a ‘Check Recipient’ item. If this item is turned on, then the address is checked against the recipient instead of the sender. This is useful for mailing lists.
  2. An alias prefixed by mh-default-folder-prefix corresponding to the address is used. The prefix is used to prevent clutter in your mail directory. See section Aliases.

If the derived folder does not exist, and mh-default-folder-must-exist-flag is t, then the last folder name used is suggested. This is useful if you get mail from various people for whom you have an alias, but file them all in the same project folder.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

5 Incorporating Your Mail

This chapter talks about getting mail from your system mailbox into your MH ‘+inbox’ folder. The following command accomplishes that and is found in the ‘Folder’ menu.

i

Incorporate new mail into a folder (mh-inc-folder).

The following options in the ‘mh-inc’ customization group are used.

mh-inc-prog

Program to incorporate mail (default: "inc").

mh-inc-spool-list

Alternate spool files (default: nil).

The following hook is available.

mh-inc-folder-hook

Hook run by mh-inc-folder after incorporating mail into a folder (default: nil).

If at any time you receive new mail, incorporate the new mail into your ‘+inbox’ buffer with i (mh-inc-folder). Note that i will display the ‘+inbox’ buffer, even if there isn’t any new mail. You can incorporate mail from any file into the current folder by specifying a prefix argument; you’ll be prompted for the name of the file to use as well as the destination folder (for example, C-u i ~/mbox <RET> +tmp <RET>).

Emacs can notify you when you have new mail by displaying ‘Mail’ in the mode line. To enable this behavior, and to have a clock in the mode line as well, add the following to ‘~/.emacs’:

(display-time)

The name of the program that incorporates new mail is stored in mh-inc-prog; it is "inc" by default. This program generates a one-line summary for each of the new messages. Unless it is an absolute pathname, the file is assumed to be in the mh-progs directory (see section Getting Started). You may also link a file to inc that uses a different format (see ‘mh-profile’(5), and sections Reading Mail: inc show next prev and MH Format Strings in the MH book). You’ll then need to modify several variables appropriately (see section Scan Line Formats).

You can use the mh-inc-spool-list variable to direct MH-E to retrieve mail from arbitrary spool files other than your system mailbox, file it in folders other than your ‘+inbox’, and assign key bindings to incorporate this mail.

Suppose you are subscribed to the mh-e-devel mailing list and you use procmail to filter this mail into ‘~/mail/mh-e’ with the following recipe in ‘.procmailrc’:

PATH=$PATH:/usr/bin/mh
MAILDIR=$HOME/`mhparam Path`
:0:
* ^From mh-e-devel-admin@stop.mail-abuse.org
mh-e

In order to incorporate ‘~/mail/mh-e’ into ‘+mh-e’ with an I m (mh-inc-spool-mh-e) command, customize this option, and click on the ‘INS’ button. Enter a ‘Spool File’ of ‘~/mail/mh-e’, a ‘Folder’ of ‘mh-e’, and a ‘Key Binding’ of ‘m’.

You can use xbuffy to automate the incorporation of this mail using the Emacs 23 command emacsclient as follows:

box ~/mail/mh-e
    title mh-e
    origMode
    polltime 10
    headertime 0
    command emacsclient --eval '(mh-inc-spool-mh-e)'

In XEmacs, the command gnuclient is used in a similar fashion.

You can set the hook mh-inc-folder-hook, which is called after new mail is incorporated by the i (mh-inc-folder) command. A good use of this hook is to rescan the whole folder either after running M-x mh-rmail the first time or when you’ve changed the message numbers from outside of MH-E.

(defun my-mh-inc-folder-hook ()
  "Hook to rescan folder after incorporating mail."
  (if (buffer-modified-p)            ; if outstanding refiles and deletes,
      (mh-execute-commands))         ;   carry them out
  (mh-rescan-folder)                 ; synchronize with +inbox
  (mh-show))                         ; show the current message

(add-hook 'mh-inc-folder-hook 'my-mh-inc-folder-hook)

Rescan folder after incorporating new mail via mh-inc-folder-hook


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

6 Reading Your Mail

The MH-E entry point for reading mail is M-x mh-rmail. This command incorporates your mail and creates a buffer called ‘+inbox’ in MH-Folder mode. The command M-x mh-rmail shows you only new mail, not mail you have already read(13).

There are some commands that need to read mail, such as mouse-2 over the ‘Mail’ button that display-time adds to the mode line. You can configure Emacs to have these commands use MH-E by setting the option read-mail-command to ‘mh-rmail’.

The ‘+inbox’ buffer contains scan lines, which are one-line summaries of each incorporated message. You can perform most MH commands on these messages via one- or two-letter commands in either the MH-Folder or MH-Show buffers or by using the ‘Message’ menu. See scan(1) for a description of the contents of the scan lines, and see the Figure in Receiving Mail, for an example.

?

Display cheat sheet for the MH-E commands (mh-help).

<RET>

Display message (mh-show).

, (comma)

Display message with all header fields (mh-header-display).

: (colon)

Display message with the default preferred alternative (mh-show-preferred-alternative).

; (semicolon)

Toggle the value of mh-decode-mime-flag (mh-toggle-mh-decode-mime-flag).

<SPC>

Display next page in message (mh-page-msg).

<BS>

Display previous page in message (mh-previous-page).

>

Append message to end of file (mh-write-msg-to-file).

|

Pipe message through shell command (mh-pipe-msg).

C-d

Delete range, don’t move to next message (mh-delete-msg-no-motion).

d

Delete range (mh-delete-msg).

D ?

Display cheat sheet for the commands of the current prefix in minibuffer (mh-prefix-help).

D <SPC>

Display next message in digest (mh-page-digest).

D <BS>

Display previous message in digest (mh-page-digest-backwards).

D b

Break up digest into separate messages (mh-burst-digest).

g

Go to a message (mh-goto-msg).

k

Delete messages with same subject or thread (mh-delete-subject-or-thread).

K ?

Display cheat sheet for the commands of the current prefix in minibuffer (mh-prefix-help).

K <TAB>

Go to the next button (mh-next-button).

K S-<TAB>

Go to the previous button (mh-prev-button).

K a

Save attachments (mh-mime-save-parts).

K e

View attachment externally (mh-display-with-external-viewer).

K i

Show attachment verbatim (mh-folder-inline-mime-part).

K o

Save (output) attachment (mh-folder-save-mime-part).

K t

Toggle option mh-display-buttons-for-inline-parts-flag (mh-toggle-mime-buttons).

K v

View attachment (mh-folder-toggle-mime-part).

M

Edit message (mh-modify).

M-<

Display first message (mh-first-msg).

M->

Display last message (mh-last-msg).

M-n

Display next unread message (mh-next-unread-msg).

M-p

Display previous unread message (mh-previous-unread-msg).

n

Display next message (mh-next-undeleted-msg).

p

Display previous message (mh-previous-undeleted-msg).

P ?

Display cheat sheet for the commands of the current prefix in minibuffer (mh-prefix-help).

P C

Toggle whether color is used in printing messages (mh-ps-print-toggle-color).

P F

Toggle whether printing is done with faces or not (mh-ps-print-toggle-faces).

P f

Print range to file (mh-ps-print-msg-file).

P l

Print range the old fashioned way (mh-print-msg).

P p

Print range (mh-ps-print-msg).

X ?

Display cheat sheet for the commands of the current prefix in minibuffer (mh-prefix-help).

X s
X u

Unpack message created with uudecode or shar (mh-store-msg).

mouse-2

Move point to mouse event and show message (mh-show-mouse).

Within the MH-Show buffer, the following command is defined.

<RET>
mouse-1
mouse-2

View contents of button (mh-press-button).

The following table lists options in the ‘mh-show’ customization group that are used while reading mail.

mh-bury-show-buffer-flag

On means show buffer is buried (default: ‘on’).

mh-clean-message-header-flag

On means remove extraneous header fields (default: ‘on’).

mh-decode-mime-flag

On means attachments are handled (default: ‘on’ if the Gnus ‘mm-decode’ package is present).

mh-display-buttons-for-alternatives-flag

On means display buttons for all alternative attachments (default: ‘off’).

mh-display-buttons-for-inline-parts-flag

On means display buttons for all inline attachments (default: ‘off’).

mh-do-not-confirm-flag

On means non-reversible commands do not prompt for confirmation (default: ‘off’).

mh-fetch-x-image-url

Control fetching of ‘X-Image-URL:’ header field image (default: ‘Never Fetch’).

mh-graphical-smileys-flag

On means graphical smileys are displayed (default: ‘on’).

mh-graphical-emphasis-flag

On means graphical emphasis is displayed (default: ‘on’).

mh-highlight-citation-style

Style for highlighting citations (default: ‘Multicolor’).

mh-invisible-header-fields-default

List of hidden header fields (default: a checklist too long to list here).

mh-invisible-header-fields

Additional header fields to hide (default: nil).

mh-lpr-command-format

Command used to print (default: "lpr -J '%s'").

mh-max-inline-image-height

Maximum inline image height if ‘Content-Disposition:’ is not present (default: 0).

mh-max-inline-image-width

Maximum inline image width if ‘Content-Disposition:’ is not present(default: 0).

mh-mhl-format-file

Specifies the format file to pass to the mhl program (default: ‘Use Default mhl Format (Printing Only)’).

mh-mime-save-parts-default-directory

Default directory to use for K a.

mh-print-background-flag

On means messages should be printed in the background (default: ‘off’).

mh-show-buffer-mode-line-buffer-id

Format string to produce mode-line-buffer-identification for show buffers (default: " {show-%s} %d").

mh-show-maximum-size

Maximum size of message (in bytes) to display automatically (default: 0).

mh-show-use-xface-flag

On means display face images in MH-Show buffers (default: ‘on’).

mh-store-default-directory

Default directory for X s (default: ‘Current’).

mh-summary-height

Number of lines in MH-Folder buffer (including the mode line) (default: depends on size of frame).

The following hooks are available.

mh-delete-msg-hook

Hook run after marking each message for deletion (default: nil).

mh-show-hook

Hook run after <RET> shows a message (default: nil).

mh-show-mode-hook

Hook run upon entry to mh-show-mode (default: nil).

The following faces are available.

mh-show-cc

Face used to highlight ‘cc:’ header fields.

mh-show-date

Face used to highlight ‘Date:’ header fields.

mh-show-from

Face used to highlight ‘From:’ header fields.

mh-show-header

Face used to deemphasize less interesting header fields.

mh-show-pgg-bad

Bad PGG signature face.

mh-show-pgg-good

Good PGG signature face.

mh-show-pgg-unknown

Unknown or untrusted PGG signature face.

mh-show-signature

Signature face.

mh-show-subject

Face used to highlight ‘Subject:’ header fields.

mh-show-to

Face used to highlight ‘To:’ header fields.

mh-show-xface

X-Face image face.

The functions and variables introduced here are explained in more detail in the following sections.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

6.1 Viewing Your Mail

The command <RET> (mh-show) displays the message that the cursor is on while mouse-2 (mh-show-mouse) displays the message that the mouse cursor is on. If the message is already displayed, it scrolls to the beginning of the message. Use <SPC> (mh-page-msg) and <BS> (mh-previous-page) to move forwards and backwards one page at a time through the message. You can give either of these commands a prefix argument that specifies the number of lines to scroll (such as 10 <SPC>). The <SPC> command will also show the next undeleted message if it is used at the bottom of a message. MH-E normally hides a lot of the superfluous header fields that mailers add to a message, but if you wish to see all of them, use the command , (comma; mh-header-display).

The option mh-show-maximum-size provides an opportunity to skip over large messages which may be slow to load. The default value of 0 means that all message are shown regardless of size.

A litany of options control what displayed messages look like.

First, the appearance of the header fields can be modified by customizing the associated face: mh-show-to, mh-show-cc, mh-show-from, mh-show-date, and mh-show-subject. The face mh-show-header is used to deemphasize the other, less interesting, header fields.

Normally messages are delivered with a handful of uninteresting header fields. These are hidden by turning on the option mh-clean-message-header-flag (which it is by default). The header fields listed in the option mh-invisible-header-fields-default are hidden, although you can check off any field that you would like to see. Header fields that you would like to hide that aren’t listed can be added to the option mh-invisible-header-fields with a couple of caveats. Regular expressions are not allowed. Unique fields should have a ‘:’ suffix; otherwise, the element can be used to render invisible an entire class of fields that start with the same prefix. If you think a header field should be generally ignored, please update SF #245.

MH-E can display the content of ‘Face:’, ‘X-Face:’, and ‘X-Image-URL:’ header fields. If any of these fields occur in the header of your message, the sender’s face will appear in the ‘From:’ header field. If more than one of these fields appear, then the first field found in the order ‘Face:’, ‘X-Face:’, and ‘X-Image-URL:’ will be used. The option mh-show-use-xface-flag is used to turn this feature on and off. This feature will be turned on by default if your system supports it.

The first header field used, if present, is the Gnus-specific ‘Face:’ field(14).

Next is the traditional ‘X-Face:’ header field(15). MH-E renders the foreground and background of the image using the associated attributes of the face mh-show-xface.

Finally, MH-E will display images referenced by the ‘X-Image-URL:’ header field if neither the ‘Face:’ nor the ‘X-Face:’ fields are present(16). Of the three header fields this is the most efficient in terms of network usage since the image doesn’t need to be transmitted with every single mail. The option mh-fetch-x-image-url controls the fetching of the ‘X-Image-URL:’ header field image with the following values:

Ask Before Fetching

You are prompted before the image is fetched. MH-E will remember your reply and will either use the already fetched image the next time the same URL is encountered or silently skip it if you didn’t fetch it the first time. This is a good setting.

Never Fetch

Images are never fetched and only displayed if they are already present in the cache. This is the default.

There isn’t a value of ‘Always Fetch’ for privacy and DOS (denial of service) reasons. For example, fetching a URL can tip off a spammer that you’ve read his email (which is why you shouldn’t blindly answer yes if you’ve set this option to ‘Ask Before Fetching’). Someone may also flood your network and fill your disk drive by sending a torrent of messages, each specifying a unique URL to a very large file.

The cache of images is found in the directory ‘.mhe-x-image-cache’ within your MH directory. You can add your own face to the ‘From:’ field too. See section Inserting Your Picture.

Normally MH-E takes care of displaying messages itself (rather than calling an MH program to do the work). If you’d rather have mhl display the message (within MH-E), change the option mh-mhl-format-file from its default value of ‘Use Default mhl Format (Printing Only)’. You can set this option to ‘Use Default mhl Format’ to get the same output as you would get if you ran mhl from the shell. If you have a format file that you want MH-E to use, you can set this option to ‘Specify an mhl Format File’ and enter the name of your format file (mhl(1) or section Using mhl in the MH book tells you how to write one). Your format file should specify a non-zero value for ‘overflowoffset’ to allow MH-E to parse the header. Note that mhl is always used for printing and forwarding; in this case, the value of mh-mhl-format-file is consulted if you have specified a format file.

If the sender of the message has cited other messages in his message, then MH-E will highlight these citations to emphasize the sender’s actual response. The option mh-highlight-citation-style can be customized to change the highlighting style. The ‘Multicolor’ method uses a different color for each indentation while the ‘Monotone’ method highlights all citations in red. To disable highlighting of citations entirely, choose ‘None’.

Email addresses and URLs in the message are highlighted if the option goto-address-highlight-p is on, which it is by default. To view the web page for a highlighted URL or to send a message using a highlighted email address, use mouse-2 or C-c <RET> (goto-address-at-point). See section Sending Mail, to see how to configure Emacs to send the message using MH-E.

It is a long standing custom to inject body language using a cornucopia of punctuation, also known as the smileys. MH-E can render these as graphical widgets if the option mh-graphical-smileys-flag is turned on, which it is by default. Smileys include patterns such as :-) and ;-). Similarly, a few typesetting features are indicated in ASCII text with certain characters. If your terminal supports it, MH-E can render these typesetting directives naturally if the option mh-graphical-emphasis-flag is turned on, which it is by default. For example, _underline_ will be underlined,*bold* will appear in bold, /italics/ will appear in italics, and so on. See the option gnus-emphasis-alist for the whole list. Both of these options are disabled if the option mh-decode-mime-flag is turned off. See section Viewing Attachments.

MH-E normally renders signatures and vCards in italics so that the body of the message stands out more. MH-E depends on the presence of the signature separator ("-- ") to do this. You can also customize the face mh-show-signature so the appearance of the signature block is more to your liking.

Two hooks can be used to control how messages are displayed. The first hook, mh-show-mode-hook, is called early on in the process of the message display. It is usually used to perform some action on the message’s content. The second hook, mh-show-hook, is the last thing called after messages are displayed. It’s used to affect the behavior of MH-E in general or when mh-show-mode-hook is too early.

For those who like to modify their mode lines, use mh-show-buffer-mode-line-buffer-id to modify the mode line in the MH-Show buffers. Place the two escape strings ‘%s’ and ‘%d’, which will display the folder name and the message number, respectively, somewhere in the string in that order. The default value of "{show-%s} %d" yields a mode line of

-----{show-+inbox} 4      (MH-Show)--Bot--------------------------------

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

6.2 Viewing Attachments

MH has the ability to display MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) messages which are simply messages with additional body parts or attachments. You can use the MH commands show(17) or mhshow(18) from the shell to read MIME messages(19).

MH-E can handle attachments as well if the Gnus ‘mm-decode’ package is present. If so, the option mh-decode-mime-flag will be on. Otherwise, you’ll see the MIME body parts rather than text or attachments. There isn’t much point in turning off the option mh-decode-mime-flag; however, you can inspect it if it appears that the body parts are not being interpreted correctly or toggle it with the command ; (semicolon; mh-toggle-mh-decode-mime-flag) to view the raw message. This option also controls the display of quoted-printable messages and other graphical widgets. See section Viewing Your Mail.

Attachments in MH-E are indicated by buttons like this:

[1. image/jpeg; foo.jpg]...

To view the contents of the button, use either mouse-1 or mouse-2 on the button or <RET> (mh-press-button) when the cursor is over the button. This command is a toggle so if you use it again on the same attachment, it is hidden. If Emacs does not know how to display the attachment, then Emacs offers to save the attachment in a file. To move the cursor to the next button, use the command K <TAB> (mh-next-button). If the end of the buffer is reached then the search wraps over to the start of the buffer. To move the cursor to the previous button, use the command K S-<TAB> (mh-prev-button). If the beginning of the buffer is reached then the search wraps over to the end of the buffer.

Another way to view the contents of a button is to use the command K v (mh-folder-toggle-mime-part). This command displays (or hides) the attachment associated with the button under the cursor. If the cursor is not located over a button, then the cursor first moves to the next button, wrapping to the beginning of the message if necessary. This command has the advantage over the previous commands of working from the MH-Folder buffer. You can also provide a numeric prefix argument (as in 4 K v) to view the attachment labeled with that number. If Emacs does not know how to display the attachment, then Emacs offers to save the attachment in a file.

If Emacs does not know how to view an attachment, you could save it into a file and then run some program to open it. It is easier, however, to launch the program directly from MH-E with the command K e (mh-display-with-external-viewer). While you’ll most likely use this to view spreadsheets and documents, it is also useful to use your browser to view HTML attachments with higher fidelity than what Emacs can provide. This command displays the attachment associated with the button under the cursor. If the cursor is not located over a button, then the cursor first moves to the next button, wrapping to the beginning of the message if necessary. You can provide a numeric prefix argument (as in 4 K e) to view the attachment labeled with that number. This command tries to provide a reasonable default for the viewer by calling the Emacs function mailcap-mime-info. This function usually reads the file ‘/etc/mailcap’.

Use the command K o (mh-folder-save-mime-part) to save attachments (the mnemonic is “output”). This command saves the attachment associated with the button under the cursor. If the cursor is not located over a button, then the cursor first moves to the next button, wrapping to the beginning of the message if necessary. You can also provide a numeric prefix argument (as in 3 K o) to save the attachment labeled with that number. This command prompts you for a filename and suggests a specific name if it is available.

You can save all of the attachments at once with the command K a (mh-mime-save-parts). The attachments are saved in the directory specified by the option mh-mime-save-parts-default-directory unless you use a prefix argument (as in C-u K a) in which case you are prompted for the directory. These directories may be superseded by MH profile components, since this function calls on mhstore (mhn) to do the work.

The default value for the option mh-mime-save-parts-default-directory is ‘Prompt Always’ so that you are always prompted for the directory in which to save the attachments. However, if you usually use the same directory within a session, then you can set this option to ‘Prompt the First Time’ to avoid the prompt each time. you can make this directory permanent by choosing ‘Directory’ and entering the directory’s name.

The sender can request that attachments should be viewed inline so that they do not really appear like an attachment at all to the reader. Most of the time, this is desirable, so by default MH-E suppresses the buttons for inline attachments. On the other hand, you may receive code or HTML which the sender has added to his message as inline attachments so that you can read them in MH-E. In this case, it is useful to see the buttons so that you know you don’t have to cut and paste the code into a file; you can simply save the attachment. If you want to make the buttons visible for inline attachments, you can use the command K t (mh-toggle-mime-buttons) to toggle the visibility of these buttons. You can turn on these buttons permanently by turning on the option mh-display-buttons-for-inline-parts-flag.

MH-E cannot display all attachments inline however. It can display text (including HTML) and images.

Some older mail programs do not insert the needed plumbing(20) to tell MH-E whether to display the attachments inline or not. If this is the case, MH-E will display these images inline if they are smaller than the window. However, you might want to allow larger images to be displayed inline. To do this, you can change the options mh-max-inline-image-width and mh-max-inline-image-height from their default value of zero to a large number. The size of your screen is a good choice for these numbers.

Sometimes, a mail program will produce multiple alternatives of an attachment in increasing degree of faithfulness to the original content. By default, only the preferred alternative is displayed. If the option mh-display-buttons-for-alternatives-flag is on, then the preferred part is shown inline and buttons are shown for each of the other alternatives.

Many people prefer to see the ‘text/plain’ alternative rather than the ‘text/html’ alternative. To do this in MH-E, customize the option mm-discouraged-alternatives, and add ‘text/html’. The next best alternative, if any, will be shown.

Occasionally, though, you might want to see the preferred alternative. The command : (mh-show-preferred-alternative) displays the message with the default preferred alternative. This is as if mm-discouraged-alternatives is set to ‘nil’. Use the command <RET> (mh-show) to show the message normally again.

You can view the raw contents of an attachment with the command K i (mh-folder-inline-mime-part). This command displays (or hides) the contents of the attachment associated with the button under the cursor verbatim. If the cursor is not located over a button, then the cursor first moves to the next button, wrapping to the beginning of the message if necessary. You can also provide a numeric prefix argument (as in 4 K i) to view the attachment labeled with that number.

For additional information on buttons, see the chapters Article Buttons and MIME Commands in the The Gnus Manual.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

6.3 HTML

MH-E can display messages that have been sent in HTML. The content of the message will appear in the MH-Show buffer as you would expect if the entire message is HTML, or there is an inline HTML body part. However, if there is an HTML body part that is an attachment, then you’ll see a button like this:

[1. text/html; foo.html]...

To see how to read the contents of this body part, see Viewing Attachments.

The browser that MH-E uses is determined by the option mm-text-html-renderer. The default setting is set automatically based upon the presence of a known browser on your system. If you wish to use a different browser, then set this option accordingly. See the documentation for the browser you use for additional information on how to use it. In particular, find and disable the option to render images, as displaying remote images can tip off spammers that the email address they have used is valid.

If you’re confused about which mm-text-html-renderer to use, here’s a brief description of each, sorted by name.

gnus-w3m

The ‘gnus-w3m’ browser requires an external program. It’s quick, produces pretty nice output, and it highlights links. It renders ‘&ndash;’ and ‘&reg;’ okay. It sometimes fails to wrap lines properly. It always downloads remote images.

html2text

The ‘html2text’ browser requires an external program. Some users have reported problems with it, such as filling the entire message as if it were one paragraph, or displaying chunks of raw HTML.

links

The ‘links’ browser requires an external program. It’s quick, and produces nicer output than ‘lynx’ on single column mails in tables. However, it doesn’t show links and it doesn’t do as nice a job on multi-column tables as some lines wrap. It does do a good job of fitting text within 80 columns. It appears to render special characters using ASCII equivalents. For example, ‘&reg;’ appears as (R). It does not download images.

lynx

The ‘lynx’ browser requires an external program. It’s quick and produces pretty decent output but it doesn’t show links. It doesn’t seem to do multi-column tables which makes output much cleaner. It centers the output and wraps long lines more than most. It does not always handle special characters like ‘&reg;’ or ‘&ndash;’. It does not download images.

nil

This choice obviously requires an external browser. With this setting, HTML messages have a button for the body part which you can view with K v (mh-folder-toggle-mime-part). Rendering of special characters and handling of remote images depends on your choice of browser.

shr

This choice does not require an external program, but it does require that Emacs be configured at build time to use ‘libxml2’. It is fairly quick, it highlights links, and it supports HTML color declarations. It renders ‘&ndash;’ and ‘&reg;’ okay. It sometimes truncates text, particularly if the message tries to have fancy text layout. By default it does not download images; this behavior is controlled by the options mm-html-blocked-images and mm-html-inhibit-images (see section Display Customization in the The Emacs MIME Manual).

w3m

The ‘w3m’ browser requires an external program. It’s quick, produces pretty nice output, and it highlights links. These can be clicked with mouse-2 to view the content of the link in ‘w3m’. The ‘w3m’ browser handles tables well and actually respects the table’s width parameter (which can cause text to wrap if the author didn’t anticipate that the page would be viewed in Emacs). It does not download images by default; this behavior is controlled by the option mm-w3m-safe-url-regexp (see section Display Customization in the The Emacs MIME Manual).

w3m-standalone

This browser is quick, but does not show links. It handles simple tables but some tables get rendered much wider than the Emacs frame. This browser renders ‘&ndash;’ and ‘&reg;’ okay. It does not download images.

For a couple more sources of information about mm-text-html-renderer, see section Display Customization in the The Emacs MIME Manual and the documentation for the Gnus command W h (see section Article Washing in the The Gnus Manual).

A useful key binding that you can add to ‘~/.emacs’ is the following which displays an HTML link or textual URL in an external browser when clicked with S-mouse-2. This binding works in any buffer, including HTML buffers.

(global-set-key [S-mouse-2] 'browse-url-at-mouse)

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

6.4 Digests

A digest is a message that contains other messages. Special MH-E commands let you read digests conveniently. You can use <SPC> and <BS> to page through the digest as if it were a normal message, but if you wish to skip to the next message in the digest, use D <SPC> (mh-page-digest). To return to a previous message, use D <BS> (mh-page-digest-backwards).

Another handy command is D b (mh-burst-digest). This command uses the MH command burst(21) to break out each message in the digest into its own message. Using this command, you can quickly delete unwanted messages, like this: Once the digest is split up, toggle out of MH-Folder Show mode with t (see section Organizing Your Mail with Folders) so that the scan lines fill the screen and messages aren’t displayed. Then use d (see section Reading Your Mail) to quickly delete messages that you don’t want to read (based on the ‘Subject:’ header field). You can also burst the digest to reply directly to the people who posted the messages in the digest. One problem you may encounter is that the ‘From:’ header fields are preceded with a ‘>’ so that your reply can’t create the ‘To:’ field correctly. In this case, you must correct the ‘To:’ field yourself. This is described later (see section Editing a Draft).


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages

You can read encrypted or signed PGP or GPG messages with MH-E(22). This section assumes that you already have a good understanding of GPG and have set up your keys appropriately.

If someone sends you a signed message, here is what you’ll see:

[[PGP Signed Part:Bill Wohler <wohler@stop.mail-abuse.org>]]
This is a signed message.

[[End of PGP Signed Part]]

If the key for the given signature is not in your keychain, you’ll be given the opportunity to fetch the key from a key server and verify the key. If the message is really large, the verification process can take a long time. You can press C-g at any time to cancel(23).

If the signature doesn’t check out, you might see something like this:

[[PGP Signed Part:Failed]]
This is a signed message.
This is garbage added after the signature was made.

[[End of PGP Signed Part]]

If someone sends you an encrypted message, MH-E will ask for your passphrase to decrypt the message. You should see something like this:

[[PGP Encrypted Part:OK]]

[[PGP Signed Part:Bill Wohler <wohler@stop.mail-abuse.org>]]
This is the secret message.

[[End of PGP Signed Part]]

[[End of PGP Encrypted Part]]

If there is a problem decrypting the message, the button will say:

[[PGP Encrypted Part:Failed]]

You can read the contents of this button using the methods described in Viewing Attachments. If the message were corrupted, you’d see this:

[[PGP Encrypted Part:Failed]
Invalid base64 data]

If your passphrase were incorrect, you’d see something like this:

[GNUPG:] ENC_TO CD9C88BB610BD9AD 1 0
[GNUPG:] USERID_HINT CD9C88BB610BD9AD Bill Wohler <wohler@stop.mail-abuse.org>
[GNUPG:] NEED_PASSPHRASE CD9C88BB610BD9AD CD9C88BB610BD9AD 1 0
[GNUPG:] BAD_PASSPHRASE CD9C88BB610BD9AD
gpg: encrypted with 1024-bit RSA key, ID 610BD9AD, created 1997-09-09
      "Bill Wohler <wohler@stop.mail-abuse.org>"
gpg: public key decryption failed: bad passphrase
[GNUPG:] BEGIN_DECRYPTION
[GNUPG:] DECRYPTION_FAILED
gpg: decryption failed: secret key not available
[GNUPG:] END_DECRYPTION

gpg exited abnormally: '2'

The appearance of the buttons is controlled by the faces mh-show-pgg-good, mh-show-pgg-bad, and mh-show-pgg-unknown depending on the validity of the signature. The latter is used whether the signature is unknown or untrusted.

The ‘pgg’ customization group may have some settings which may interest you. See The PGG Manual.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

6.6 Printing Your Mail

To print messages in MH-E, use the command P p (mh-ps-print-msg). You can print all the messages in a range (as in C-u P p 1 3 5-7 last:5 frombob <RET>, see section Ranges). You can also send the output to a file with P f (mh-ps-print-msg-file). This command will print inline text attachments but will not decrypt messages. However, when a message is displayed in an MH-Show buffer, then that buffer is used verbatim for printing with the caveat that only text attachments, if opened inline, are printed. Therefore, encrypted messages can be printed by showing and decrypting them first. The commands P p and P f do not use the options mh-lpr-command-format or mh-print-background-flag, described below.

Colors are emulated on black-and-white printers with shades of gray. This might produce illegible output, even if your screen colors only use shades of gray. If this is the case, try using the command P C (mh-ps-print-toggle-color) to toggle between color, no color, and a black and white representation of the colors and see which works best. You change this setting permanently by customizing the option ps-print-color-p.

Another related function is the command P F (mh-ps-print-toggle-faces). This command toggles between using faces and not. When faces are enabled, the printed message will look very similar to the message in the MH-Show buffer.

MH-E uses the ‘ps-print’ package to do the printing, so you can customize the printing further by going to the ‘ps-print’ customization group.

An alternative to using the ‘ps-print’ package is the command P l (mh-print-msg) (the l is for line printer or lpr). You can print all the messages in a range. The message is formatted with mhl(24) and printed with the lpr command.

The command P l uses two options. The option mh-lpr-command-format contains the Unix command line which performs the actual printing. The string can contain one escape, ‘%s’, which is replaced by the name of the folder and the message number and is useful for print job names. The default setting is "lpr -J '%s'". I use "mpage -h'%s' -b Letter -H1of -mlrtb -P" which produces a nice header and adds a bit of margin so the text fits within my printer’s margins. Normally messages are printed in the foreground. If this is slow on your system, you may elect to turn on the option mh-print-background-flag to print in the background. If you do this, do not delete the message until it is printed or else the output may be truncated. These options are not used by the commands P p or P f.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

6.7 Files and Pipes

MH-E does offer a couple of commands that are not a part of MH. The first one, > (mh-write-msg-to-file), writes a message to a file. You are prompted for the filename. If the file already exists, the message is appended to it. You can also write the message to the file without the header by specifying a prefix argument (such as C-u > /tmp/foobar <RET>). Subsequent writes to the same file can be made with the command ! (mh-refile-or-write-again).

You can also pipe the message through a Unix shell command with the command | (mh-pipe-msg). You are prompted for the Unix command through which you wish to run your message. If you give a prefix argument to this command, the message header is included in the text passed to the command (the contrived example C-u | lpr would be done with the l command instead).

If the message is a shell archive shar or has been run through uuencode use X s (mh-store-msg) to extract the body of the message. The default directory for extraction is the current directory; however, you have a chance to specify a different extraction directory. The next time you use this command, the default directory is the last directory you used. If you would like to change the initial default directory, customize the option mh-store-default-directory, change the value from ‘Current’ to ‘Directory’, and then enter the name of the directory for storing the content of these messages.

By the way, X s calls the Emacs Lisp function mh-store-buffer. I mention this because you can use it directly if you’re editing a buffer that contains a file that has been run through uuencode or shar. For example, you can extract the contents of the current buffer in your home directory by typing M-x mh-store-buffer <RET> ~ <RET>.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

6.8 Navigating

To move on to the next message, use the command n (mh-next-undeleted-msg); use p (mh-previous-undeleted-msg) to read the previous message. To move to the next unread message, use M-n (mh-next-unread-msg); use M-p (mh-previous-unread-msg) to move to the previous unread message. These commands can be given a prefix argument to specify how many messages to skip (for example, 5 n). You can also move to a specific message with g (mh-goto-msg). You can enter the message number either before or after typing g. In the latter case, Emacs prompts you. Finally, you can go to the first or last message with M-< (mh-first-msg) and M-> (mh-last-msg) respectively.

You can also use the Emacs commands C-p (previous-line) and C-n (next-line) to move up and down the scan lines in the MH-Folder window. These commands can be used in conjunction with <RET> to look at deleted or refiled messages.

To mark a message for deletion, use the command d (mh-delete-msg). A ‘D’ is placed by the message in the scan window, and the next undeleted message is displayed. If the previous command had been p, then the next message displayed is the first undeleted message previous to the message just deleted. Use n to force subsequent d commands to move forward to the next undeleted message after deleting the message under the cursor. You may also specify a range (for example, C-u d 1 3 5-7 last:5 frombob <RET>, see section Ranges).

The command C-d (mh-delete-msg-no-motion) marks the message (or messages in range) for deletion but leaves the cursor at the current message in case you wish to perform other operations on the message.

And to delete more messages faster, you can use k (mh-delete-subject-or-thread) to delete all the messages with the same subject as the current message. This command puts these messages in a sequence named ‘subject’. You can undo this action by using u (mh-undo) with a prefix argument and then specifying the ‘subject’ sequence. However, if the buffer is displaying a threaded view of the folder then k behaves like T d (mh-thread-delete). See section Viewing Message Threads.

However you mark a message for deletion, the command x (mh-execute-commands) actually carries out the deletion (see section Organizing Your Mail with Folders).

The hook mh-delete-msg-hook is called after you mark a message for deletion. For example, a past maintainer of MH-E used this once when he kept statistics on his mail usage.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options

This section contains a few more miscellaneous commands and options.

There are times when you need to edit a message. For example, you may need to fix a broken Content-Type header field. You can do this with the command M (mh-modify). It displays the raw message in an editable buffer. When you are done editing, save and kill the buffer as you would any other.

Commands such as mh-pack-folder prompt to confirm whether to process outstanding moves and deletes or not before continuing. Turning on the option mh-do-not-confirm-flag means that these actions will be performed—which is usually desired but cannot be retracted—without question(25).

The option mh-summary-height controls the number of scan lines displayed in the MH-Folder window, including the mode line. The default value of this option is ‘Automatic’ which means that the MH-Folder buffer will maintain the same proportional size if the frame is resized. If you’d prefer a fixed height, then choose the ‘Fixed Size’ option and enter the number of lines you’d like to see.

Normally the buffer for displaying messages is buried at the bottom at the buffer stack. You may wish to disable this feature by turning off the option mh-bury-show-buffer-flag. One advantage of not burying the show buffer is that one can delete the show buffer more easily in an electric buffer list because of its proximity to its associated MH-Folder buffer. Try running M-x electric-buffer-list to see what I mean.

Before we leave this section, I’ll include a function that I use as a front end to MH-E(26). It toggles between your working window configuration, which may be quite involved—windows filled with source, compilation output, man pages, and other documentation—and your MH-E window configuration. Like the rest of the customization described in this section, simply add the following code to ‘~/.emacs’.

(defvar my-mh-screen-saved nil
  "Set to non-nil when MH-E window configuration shown.")
(defvar my-normal-screen nil "Normal window configuration.")
(defvar my-mh-screen nil "MH-E window configuration.")

(defun my-mh-rmail (&optional arg)
  "Toggle between MH-E and normal screen configurations.
With non-nil or prefix argument, include mailbox as well
when going into mail."
  (interactive "P")                 ; user callable function, P=prefix arg
  (setq my-mh-screen-saved          ; save state
        (cond
         ;; Bring up MH-E screen if arg or normal window configuration.
         ;; If arg or +inbox buffer doesn't exist, run mh-rmail.
         ((or arg (null my-mh-screen-saved))
          (setq my-normal-screen (current-window-configuration))
          (if (or arg (null (get-buffer "+inbox")))
              (mh-rmail)
            (set-window-configuration my-mh-screen))
          t)                        ; set my-mh-screen-saved to t
         ;; Otherwise, save MH-E screen and restore normal screen.
         (t
          (setq my-mh-screen (current-window-configuration))
          (set-window-configuration my-normal-screen)
          nil))))                   ; set my-mh-screen-saved to nil

(global-set-key "\C-x\r" 'my-mh-rmail)  ; call with C-x <RET>

Starting MH-E

If you type an argument (C-u) or if my-mh-screen-saved is nil (meaning a non-MH-E window configuration), the current window configuration is saved, either the ‘+inbox’ buffer is displayed or mh-rmail is run, and the MH-E window configuration is shown. Otherwise, the MH-E window configuration is saved and the original configuration is displayed.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders

This chapter discusses the things you can do with folders within MH-E. The commands in this chapter are also found in the ‘Folder’ and ‘Message’ menus.

?

Display cheat sheet for the MH-E commands (mh-help).

!

Repeat last output command (mh-refile-or-write-again).

c

Copy range to folder (mh-copy-msg).

F ?

Display cheat sheet for the commands of the current prefix in minibuffer (mh-prefix-help).

F '

Display ticked messages (mh-index-ticked-messages).

F c

Delete range from the ‘unseen’ sequence (mh-catchup).

F k

Remove folder (mh-kill-folder).

F l

List all folders (mh-list-folders).

F n

Display unseen messages (mh-index-new-messages).

F p

Pack folder (mh-pack-folder).

F q

Display messages in any sequence (mh-index-sequenced-messages).

F r

Rescan folder (mh-rescan-folder).

F s

Search your MH mail (mh-search).

F S

Sort folder (mh-sort-folder).

F u

Undo all refiles and deletes in the current folder (mh-undo-folder).

F v

Visit folder (mh-visit-folder).

o

Refile (output) range into folder (mh-refile-msg).

q

Quit the current MH-E folder (mh-quit).

t

Toggle between MH-Folder and MH-Folder Show modes (mh-toggle-showing).

u

Undo pending deletes or refiles in range (mh-undo).

x

Process outstanding delete and refile requests (mh-execute-commands).

The ‘mh-folder’ customization group is used to tune these commands.

mh-new-messages-folders

Folders searched for the ‘unseen’ sequence (default: Inbox).

mh-ticked-messages-folders

Folders searched for mh-tick-seq (default: t).

mh-large-folder

The number of messages that indicates a large folder (default: 200).

mh-recenter-summary-flag

On means to recenter the summary window (default: ‘off’).

mh-recursive-folders-flag

On means that commands which operate on folders do so recursively (default: ‘off’).

mh-sortm-args

Additional arguments for sortm (default: nil).

The following hooks are available.

mh-after-commands-processed-hook

Hook run by x after performing outstanding refile and delete requests (default: nil).

mh-before-commands-processed-hook

Hook run by x before performing outstanding refile and delete requests (default: nil).

mh-before-quit-hook

Hook run by q before quitting MH-E (default: nil).

mh-folder-mode-hook

Hook run by mh-folder-mode when visiting a new folder (default: nil).

mh-kill-folder-suppress-prompt-hook

Abnormal hook run at the beginning of mh-kill-folder (default: 'mh-search-p).

mh-pack-folder-hook

Hook run by mh-pack-folder after renumbering the messages (default: nil).

mh-quit-hook

Hook run by q after quitting MH-E (default: nil).

mh-refile-msg-hook

Hook run by o after marking each message for refiling (default: nil).

The following faces are available for customizing the appearance of the MH-Folder buffer. See section Scan Line Formats.

mh-folder-address

Recipient face.

mh-folder-body

Body text face.

mh-folder-cur-msg-number

Current message number face.

mh-folder-date

Date face.

mh-folder-deleted

Deleted message face.

mh-folder-followup

Re:’ face.

mh-folder-msg-number

Message number face.

mh-folder-refiled

Refiled message face.

mh-folder-sent-to-me-hint

Fontification hint face in messages sent directly to us. The detection of messages sent to us is governed by the scan format mh-scan-format-nmh and regular expression mh-scan-sent-to-me-sender-regexp.

mh-folder-scan-format

Sender face in messages sent directly to us. The detection of messages sent to us is governed by the scan format mh-scan-format-nmh and regular expression mh-scan-sent-to-me-sender-regexp.

mh-folder-subject

Subject face.

mh-folder-tick

Ticked message face.

mh-folder-to

To:’ face.

The hook mh-folder-mode-hook is called when visiting a new folder in MH-Folder mode. This could be used to set your own key bindings, for example:

(defvar my-mh-init-done nil
  "Non-nil when one-time MH-E settings made.")

(defun my-mh-folder-mode-hook ()
  "Hook to set key bindings in MH-Folder mode."
  (if (not my-mh-init-done)             ; only need to bind the keys once 
      (progn
        (local-set-key "//" 'my-search-msg)
        (local-set-key "b" 'mh-burst-digest)    ; better use of b
        (setq my-mh-init-done t))))

(add-hook 'mh-folder-mode-hook 'my-mh-folder-mode-hook)

(defun my-search-msg ()
  "Search for a regexp in the current message."
  (interactive)                         ; user function
  (save-window-excursion
    (other-window 1)                    ; go to next window
    (isearch-forward-regexp)))          ; string search; hit return
                                        ;   when done

Create additional key bindings via mh-folder-mode-hook

MH-E has analogies for each of the MH folder and refile commands(27). To refile a message in another folder, use the command o (mh-refile-msg) (mnemonic: “output”). You are prompted for the folder name (see section Folder Selection). Note that this command can also be used to create folders. If you specify a folder that does not exist, you will be prompted to create it. The hook mh-refile-msg-hook is called after a message is marked to be refiled.

If you are refiling several messages into the same folder, you can use the command ! (mh-refile-or-write-again) to repeat the last refile or write (for the description of > (mh-write-msg-to-file), see section Files and Pipes). You can use a range in either case (for example, C-u o 1 3 5-7 last:5 frombob <RET>, see section Ranges).

If you’ve deleted a message or refiled it, but changed your mind, you can cancel the action before you’ve executed it. Use u (mh-undo) to undo a refile on or deletion of a single message. You can also undo refiles and deletes for messages that are found in a given range (see section Ranges).

Alternatively, you can use F u (mh-undo-folder) to undo all refiles and deletes in the current folder.

If you’ve marked messages to be deleted or refiled and you want to go ahead and delete or refile the messages, use x (mh-execute-commands). Many MH-E commands that may affect the numbering of the messages (such as F r or F p) will ask if you want to process refiles or deletes first and then either run x for you or undo the pending refiles and deletes.

The command x runs mh-before-commands-processed-hook before the commands are processed and mh-after-commands-processed-hook after the commands are processed. Variables that are useful with the former hook include mh-delete-list and mh-refile-list which can be used to see which changes will be made to the current folder, mh-current-folder. Variables that are useful with the latter hook include mh-folders-changed, which lists which folders were affected by deletes and refiles. This list will always include the current folder mh-current-folder.

If you wish to copy a message to another folder, you can use the command c (mh-copy-msg) (see the ‘-link’ argument to refile(1)). Like the command o, this command prompts you for the name of the target folder and you can specify a range (see section Ranges). Note that unlike the command o, the copy takes place immediately. The original copy remains in the current folder.

The command t (mh-toggle-showing) switches between MH-Folder mode and MH-Folder Show mode(28). MH-Folder mode turns off the associated show buffer so that you can perform operations on the messages quickly without reading them. This is an excellent way to prune out your junk mail or to refile a group of messages to another folder for later examination.

When you use t to toggle from MH-Folder Show mode to MH-Folder mode, the MH-Show buffer is hidden and the MH-Folder buffer is left alone. Setting mh-recenter-summary-flag to a non-nil value causes the toggle to display as many scan lines as possible, with the cursor at the middle. The effect of mh-recenter-summary-flag is rather useful, but it can be annoying on a slow network connection.

When you want to read the messages that you have refiled into folders, use the command F v (mh-visit-folder) to visit the folder. You are prompted for the folder name. The folder buffer will show just unseen messages if there are any; otherwise, it will show all the messages in the buffer as long there are fewer than mh-large-folder messages. If there are more, then you are prompted for a range of messages to scan. You can provide a prefix argument in order to specify a range of messages to show when you visit the folder (see section Ranges). In this case, regions are not used to specify the range and mh-large-folder is ignored. Note that this command can also be used to create folders. If you specify a folder that does not exist, you will be prompted to create it.

If you forget where you’ve refiled your messages, you can find them using F s (mh-search). See section Searching Through Messages.

If you use a program such as procmail to file your incoming mail automatically, you can display new, unseen, messages using the command F n (mh-index-new-messages). All messages in the ‘unseen’ sequence from the folders in mh-new-messages-folders are listed. However, this list of folders can be overridden with a prefix argument: with a prefix argument, enter a space-separated list of folders, or nothing to search all folders.

If you have ticked messages (see section Using Sequences), you can display them using the command F ' (mh-index-ticked-messages). All messages in the ‘tick’ sequence from the folders in mh-ticked-messages-folders are listed. With a prefix argument, enter a space-separated list of folders, or nothing to search all folders.

You can display messages in any sequence with the command F q (mh-index-sequenced-messages). All messages from the folders in mh-new-messages-folders in the sequence you provide are listed. With a prefix argument, enter a space-separated list of folders at the prompt, or nothing to search all folders.

Set the options mh-new-messages-folders and mh-ticked-messages-folders to ‘Inbox’ to search the ‘+inbox’ folder or ‘All’ to search all of the top level folders. Otherwise, list the folders that should be searched with the ‘Choose Folders’ menu item. See mh-recursive-folders-flag.

Other commands you can perform on folders include: F l (mh-list-folders), to place a listing of all the folders in your mail directory in a buffer called ‘*MH-E Folders*’ (see section Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers); F k (mh-kill-folder), to remove a folder; F S (mh-sort-folder), to sort the messages by date (see sortm(1) to see how to sort by other criteria); F p (mh-pack-folder), to pack a folder, removing gaps from the numbering sequence; and F r (mh-rescan-folder), to rescan the folder, which is useful to grab all messages in your ‘+inbox’ after processing your new mail for the first time. If you don’t want to rescan the entire folder, the commands F r or F p will accept a range (see section Ranges).

The command F p runs mh-pack-folder-hook after renumbering the messages. A variable that is useful with this hook is mh-current-folder.

By default, operations on folders work only one level at a time. Set mh-recursive-folders-flag to non-nil to operate on all folders. This mostly means that you’ll be able to see all your folders when you press <TAB> when prompted for a folder name.

The hook mh-kill-folder-suppress-prompt-functions is an abnormal hook run at the beginning of the command k. The hook functions are called with no arguments and should return a non-nil value to suppress the normal prompt when you remove a folder. This is useful for folders that are easily regenerated. The default value of mh-search-p suppresses the prompt on folders generated by searching.


NOTE

Use this hook with care. If there is a bug in your hook which returns t on ‘+inbox’ and you press k by accident in the +inbox folder, you will not be happy.


The option mh-sortm-args holds extra arguments to pass on to the command sortm(29) when a prefix argument is used with F S. Normally default arguments to sortm are specified in the MH profile. This option may be used to provide an alternate view. For example, ‘'(\"-nolimit\" \"-textfield\" \"subject\")’ is a useful setting.

When you want to quit using MH-E and go back to editing, you can use the q (mh-quit) command. This buries the buffers of the current MH-E folder and restores the buffers that were present when you first ran M-x mh-rmail. It also removes any MH-E working buffers whose name begins with ‘ *mh-’ or ‘*MH-E ’ (see section Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers). You can later restore your MH-E session by selecting the ‘+inbox’ buffer or by running M-x mh-rmail again.

The two hooks mh-before-quit-hook and mh-quit-hook are called by q. The former one is called before the quit occurs, so you might use it to perform any MH-E operations; you could perform some query and abort the quit or call mh-execute-commands, for example. The latter is not run in an MH-E context, so you might use it to modify the window setup. If you find that q buries a lot of buffers that you would rather remove, you can use both mh-before-quit-hook and mh-quit-hook to accomplish that.

(defvar my-mh-folder-buffer-to-delete nil
  "Folder buffer that is being quit.")

(defun my-mh-before-quit-hook ()
  "Save folder buffer that is to be deleted."
  (setq my-mh-folder-buffer-to-delete (current-buffer)))

(defun my-mh-quit-hook ()
  "Kill folder buffer rather than just bury it."
  (set-buffer my-mh-folder-buffer-to-delete)
  (if (get-buffer mh-show-buffer)
      (kill-buffer mh-show-buffer))
  (kill-buffer (current-buffer)))

Kill MH-Folder buffer instead of burying it

You can use dired to manipulate the folders themselves. For example, I renamed my ‘+out’ folder to the more common ‘+outbox’ by running dired on my mail directory (M-x dired RET ~/Mail RET), moving my cursor to ‘out’ and using the command R (dired-do-rename).


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

8 Sending Mail

You can send a mail message in several ways. You can call M-x mh-smail directly, or from the command line like this:

$ emacs -f mh-smail

There are some commands that need to send a mail message, such as goto-address-at-point. You can configure Emacs to have these commands use MH-E by setting the option mail-user-agent to ‘Emacs interface to MH’.

From within MH-E’s MH-Folder mode, other methods of sending mail are available as well. These can also be found in the ‘Message’ menu.

e

Edit a message to send it again (mh-edit-again).

E

Edit a message that was returned by the mail system (mh-extract-rejected-mail).

f

Forward message (mh-forward).

r

Reply to a message (mh-reply).

s

Compose a message (mh-send).

M-d

Redistribute a message (mh-redistribute).

M-x mh-smail

Compose a message with the MH mail system.

M-x mh-smail-other-window

Compose a message with the MH mail system in other window.

In addition, several options from the ‘mh-sending-mail’ customization group are useful when sending mail or replying to mail. They are summarized in the following table.

mh-compose-forward-as-mime-flag

On means that messages are forwarded as attachments (default: ‘on’).

mh-compose-letter-function

Hook run when starting a new draft (default: nil).

mh-compose-prompt-flag

On means prompt for header fields when composing a new draft (default: ‘off’).

mh-forward-subject-format

Format string for forwarded message subject (default: "%s: %s").

mh-insert-x-mailer-flag

On means append an ‘X-Mailer:’ header field to the header (default: ‘on’).

mh-redist-full-contents-flag

On means the dist command needs entire letter for redistribution (default: ‘off’).

mh-reply-default-reply-to

Sets the person or persons to whom a reply will be sent (default: ‘Prompt’).

mh-reply-show-message-flag

On means the MH-Show buffer is displayed using r (mh-reply) (default: ‘on’).

The following hooks are available.

mh-annotate-msg-hook

Hook run by mh-annotate-msg after annotation (default: nil).

mh-forward-hook

Hook run by mh-forward on a forwarded letter (default: nil).

mh-letter-mode-hook

Hook run by mh-letter-mode on a new letter (default: nil).

A hook that is called whenever a message is sent and after the scan lines and message are annotated is mh-annotate-msg-hook. Hook functions can access the current folder name with mh-current-folder and obtain the message numbers of the annotated messages with mh-annotate-list.

The rest of the functions and options introduced here are explained in more detail in the following sections.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

8.1 Composing

Outside of an MH-Folder buffer, you must call either M-x mh-smail or M-x mh-smail-other-window to compose a new message. The former command always creates a two-window layout with the current buffer on top and the draft on the bottom. Use the latter command if you would rather preserve the window layout. You may find adding the following key bindings to ‘~/.emacs’ useful:

(global-set-key "\C-xm" 'mh-smail)
(global-set-key "\C-x4m" 'mh-smail-other-window)

From within a MH-Folder buffer, you can simply use the command m (mh-send). However you invoke mh-send, your letter appears in an Emacs buffer whose mode is MH-Letter (to see what the buffer looks like, see section Sending Mail). MH-Letter mode allows you to edit your message, to check the validity of the recipients, to insert attachments and other messages into your message, and to send the message. We’ll go more into depth about editing a draft(30) (a message you’re composing) in just a moment (see section Editing a Draft).

If you prefer to be prompted for the recipient and subject fields before the MH-Letter buffer appears, turn on the option mh-compose-prompt-flag.

MH-E adds an ‘X-Mailer:’ header field to the header that includes the version of MH-E and Emacs that you are using. If you don’t want to participate in our marketing, you can turn off the option mh-insert-x-mailer-flag.

Two hooks are provided to run commands on your freshly created draft. The first hook, mh-letter-mode-hook, allows you to do some processing before editing a letter(31). For example, you may wish to modify the header after repl has done its work, or you may have a complicated ‘components’ file and need to tell MH-E where the cursor should go. Here’s an example of how you would use this hook.

(defvar letter-mode-init-done-flag nil
  "Non-nil means one-time MH-E settings have been made.")

(defun my-mh-letter-mode-hook ()
  "Prepare letter for editing."
  (when (not letter-mode-init-done)     ; only need to bind the keys once
    (local-set-key "\C-ctb" 'add-enriched-text)
    (local-set-key "\C-cti" 'add-enriched-text)
    (local-set-key "\C-ctf" 'add-enriched-text)
    (local-set-key "\C-cts" 'add-enriched-text)
    (local-set-key "\C-ctB" 'add-enriched-text)
    (local-set-key "\C-ctu" 'add-enriched-text)
    (local-set-key "\C-ctc" 'add-enriched-text)
    (setq letter-mode-init-done t))
  (save-excursion
    (goto-char (point-max))             ; go to end of message to
    (mh-insert-signature)))             ;   insert signature

Prepare draft for editing via mh-letter-mode-hook

The function, add-enriched-text is defined in the example in Adding Attachments.

The second hook, a function really, is mh-compose-letter-function. Like mh-letter-mode-hook, it is called just before editing a new message; however, it is the last function called before you edit your message. The consequence of this is that you can write a function to write and send the message for you. This function is passed three arguments: the contents of the ‘To:’, ‘Subject:’, and ‘Cc:’ header fields.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

8.2 Replying to Mail

To compose a reply to a message, use the r (mh-reply) command.

When you reply to a message, you are first prompted with ‘Reply to whom?’. You have several choices here.

ResponseReply Goes To
fromThe person who sent the message. This is the default, so <RET> is sufficient.
toReplies to the sender, plus all recipients in the ‘To:’ header field.
cc
all
Forms a reply to the addresses in the ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ header field if one exists; otherwise forms a reply to the sender, plus all recipients.

Depending on your answer, repl(32) is given a different argument to form your reply. Specifically, a choice of from or none at all runs ‘repl -nocc all’, and a choice of to runs ‘repl -cc to’. Finally, either cc or all runs ‘repl -cc all -nocc me’. If you find that most of the time you specify one of these choices when you reply to a message, you can change the option mh-reply-default-reply-to from its default value of ‘Prompt’ to one of the choices listed above. You can always edit the recipients in the draft.

Two windows are then created. One window contains the message to which you are replying in an MH-Show buffer. Your draft, in MH-Letter mode (see section Editing a Draft), is in the other window. If the reply draft was not one that you expected, check the things that affect the behavior of repl which include the ‘repl:’ profile component and the ‘replcomps’ and ‘replgroupcomps’ files.

If you supply a prefix argument (as in C-u r), the message you are replying to is inserted in your reply after having first been run through mhl with the format file ‘mhl.reply’. See mhl(1) or the section Using mhl in the MH book to see how you can modify the default ‘mhl.reply’ file.

Alternatively, you can customize the option mh-yank-behavior and choose one of its ‘Automatically’ variants to do the same thing. See section Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying. If you do so, the prefix argument has no effect.

Another way to include the message automatically in your draft is to use ‘repl: -filter repl.filter’ in your MH profile.

If you include the message automatically, you can hide the MH-Show buffer by turning off the option mh-reply-show-message-flag.

If you wish to customize the header or other parts of the reply draft, please see repl(1) and mh-format(5).


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3 Forwarding Mail

To forward a message, use the f (mh-forward) command. You are prompted for the ‘To:’ and ‘cc:’ recipients. You are given a draft to edit that looks like it would if you had run the MH command forw(33). You can then add some text (see section Editing a Draft). You can forward several messages by using a range (see section Ranges). All of the messages in the range are inserted into your draft. The hook mh-forward-hook is called on the draft.

By default, the option mh-compose-forward-as-mime-flag is on which means that the forwarded messages are included as attachments. These are inline attachments so the forwarded message should appear in the body of your recipient’s mail program. If you would prefer to forward your messages verbatim (as text, inline), then turn off this option. Forwarding messages verbatim works well for short, textual messages, but your recipient won’t be able to view any non-textual attachments that were in the forwarded message. Be aware that if you have ‘forw: -mime’ in your MH profile, then forwarded messages will always be included as attachments regardless of the settings of mh-compose-forward-as-mime-flag.

The format of the ‘Subject:’ header field for forwarded messages is controlled by the option mh-forward-subject-format. This option is a string which includes two escapes (‘%s’). The first ‘%s’ is replaced with the sender of the original message, and the second one is replaced with the original ‘Subject:’. The default value of "%s: %s" takes a message with the header:

To: Bill Wohler <wohler@stop.mail-abuse.org>
Subject: Re: 49er football
From: Greg DesBrisay <gd@stop.mail-abuse.org>

and creates a subject header field of:

Subject: Greg DesBrisay: Re: 49er football

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

8.4 Redistributing Your Mail

The command M-d (mh-redistribute) is similar in function to forwarding mail, but it does not allow you to edit the message, nor does it add your name to the ‘From:’ header field. It appears to the recipient as if the message had come from the original sender. When you run this command, you are prompted for the recipients.

For more information on redistributing messages, see dist(1). Also investigate the command e (mh-edit-again) for another way to redistribute messages (see section Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages).

The option mh-redist-full-contents-flag must be turned on if dist(34) requires the whole letter for redistribution, which is the case if send(35) is compiled with the BERK option (which many people abhor). If you find that MH will not allow you to redistribute a message that has been redistributed before, turn off this option.

The hook mh-annotate-msg-hook is run after annotating the message and scan line (see section Sending Mail).


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages

If you don’t complete a draft for one reason or another, and if the draft buffer is no longer available, you can pick your draft up again with e (mh-edit-again). If you don’t use a draft folder, your last ‘draft’ file will be used. If you use draft folders, you’ll need to visit the draft folder with F v drafts <RET>, use n to move to the appropriate message, and then use e to prepare the message for editing.

The e command can also be used to take messages that were sent to you and to send them to more people.

Don’t use e to re-edit a message from a Mailer-Daemon who complained that your mail wasn’t posted for some reason or another. In this case, use E (mh-extract-rejected-mail) to prepare the message for editing by removing the Mailer-Daemon envelope and unneeded header fields. Fix whatever addressing problem you had, and send the message again with C-c C-c.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

9 Editing a Draft

When you edit a message that you want to send (called a draft in this case), the mode used is MH-Letter. This mode provides several commands in addition to the normal Emacs editing commands to help you edit your draft. These can also be found in the ‘Letter’ menu.

<SPC>

Perform completion or insert space (mh-letter-complete-or-space).

M-<TAB>

Perform completion on header field or word preceding point (mh-letter-complete).

, (comma)

Flash alias expansion (mh-letter-confirm-address).

<TAB>

Cycle to next field (mh-letter-next-header-field-or-indent).

S-<TAB>

Cycle to the previous header field (mh-letter-previous-header-field).

C-c ?

Display cheat sheet for the MH-E commands (mh-help).

C-c C-c

Save draft and send message (mh-send-letter).

C-c C-d

Insert fields specified by the given identity (mh-insert-identity). See section Identities.

C-c C-e

Compose MIME message from MH-style directives (mh-mh-to-mime).

C-c C-f C-a
C-c C-f a

Move to ‘Mail-Reply-To:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f C-b
C-c C-f b

Move to ‘Bcc:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f C-c
C-c C-f c

Move to ‘Cc:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f C-d
C-c C-f d

Move to ‘Dcc:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f C-f
C-c C-f f

Move to ‘Fcc:’ header field (mh-to-fcc).

C-c C-f C-l
C-c C-f l

Move to ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f C-m
C-c C-f m

Move to ‘From:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f C-r
C-c C-f r

Move to ‘Reply-To:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f C-s
C-c C-f s

Move to ‘Subject:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f C-t
C-c C-f t

Move to ‘To:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-i

Insert a message (mh-insert-letter).

C-c C-m C-e

Add tag to encrypt the message (mh-mml-secure-message-encrypt).

C-c C-m C-f
C-c C-m f

Add tag to forward a message (mh-compose-forward).

C-c C-m C-g
C-c C-m g

Add tag to include anonymous ftp reference to a file (mh-mh-compose-anon-ftp).

C-c C-m C-i
C-c C-m i

Add tag to include a file such as an image or sound (mh-compose-insertion).

C-c C-m C-m
C-c C-m m

Compose MIME message from MML tags (mh-mml-to-mime).

C-c C-m C-n
C-c C-m n

Remove any secure message tags (mh-mml-unsecure-message).

C-c C-m C-s

Add tag to sign the message (mh-mml-secure-message-sign).

C-c C-m C-t
C-c C-m t

Add tag to include anonymous ftp reference to a compressed tar file (mh-mh-compose-external-compressed-tar).

C-c C-m C-u
C-c C-m u

Undo effects of C-c C-e (mh-mh-to-mime-undo).

C-c C-m C-x
C-c C-m x

Add tag to refer to a remote file (mh-mh-compose-external-type).

C-c C-m e e

Add tag to encrypt the message (mh-mml-secure-message-encrypt).

C-c C-m e s

Add tag to encrypt and sign the message
(mh-mml-secure-message-signencrypt).

C-c C-m s e

Add tag to encrypt and sign the message
(mh-mml-secure-message-signencrypt).

C-c C-m s s

Add tag to sign the message (mh-mml-secure-message-sign).

C-c C-o

Insert a newline and leave point before it (mh-open-line).

C-c C-q

Quit editing and delete draft message (mh-fully-kill-draft).

C-c C-s

Insert signature in message (mh-insert-signature).

C-c C-t

Toggle display of header field at point (mh-letter-toggle-header-field-display).

C-c C-w

Verify recipients, showing expansion of any aliases (mh-check-whom).

C-c C-y

Insert the current message into the draft buffer (mh-yank-cur-msg).

C-c M-d

Insert custom fields if recipient is found in mh-auto-fields-list (mh-insert-auto-fields). See section Identities.

Several options from the ‘mh-letter’ customization group are used while editing a draft.

mh-compose-insertion

Type of MIME message tags in messages (default: ‘MML’ if available; otherwise ‘MH’).

mh-compose-skipped-header-fields

List of header fields to skip over when navigating in draft (default: '("From" "Organization" "References" "In-Reply-To" "X-Face" "Face" "X-Image-URL" "X-Mailer").

mh-compose-space-does-completion-flag

On means <SPC> does completion in message header (default: ‘off’).

mh-delete-yanked-msg-window-flag

On means delete any window displaying the message (default: ‘off’).

mh-extract-from-attribution-verb

Verb to use for attribution when a message is yanked by C-c C-y (default: "wrote:").

mh-ins-buf-prefix

String to put before each line of a yanked or inserted message (default: "> ").

mh-letter-complete-function

Function to call when completing outside of address or folder fields (default: ispell-complete-word).

mh-letter-fill-column

Fill column to use in MH-Letter mode (default: 72).

mh-mml-method-default

Default method to use in security tags (default: ‘PGP (MIME)’ if support for it is available; otherwise ‘None’).

mh-signature-file-name

Source of user’s signature (default: "~/.signature").

mh-signature-separator-flag

On means a signature separator should be inserted (default: ‘on’).

mh-x-face-file

File containing X-Face or Face header field to insert in outgoing mail. (default: "~/.face").

mh-yank-behavior

Controls which part of a message is yanked by C-c C-y (default: ‘Body With Attribution’).

The following hooks are available.

mail-citation-hook

Hook for modifying a citation just inserted in the mail buffer (default: nil).

mh-before-send-letter-hook

Hook run at the beginning of the C-c C-c command (default: ‘nil’).

mh-mh-to-mime-hook

Hook run on the formatted letter by C-c C-e (default: ‘nil’).

mh-insert-signature-hook

Hook run by C-c C-s after signature has been inserted (default: nil).

The following face is available.

mh-letter-header-field

Editable header field value face in draft buffers.

The commands and options introduced here are explained in more detail in the following sections.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

9.1 Editing the Message

Because the header is part of the message, you can edit the header fields as you wish. However, several convenience commands exist to help you create and edit them. For example, the command C-c C-f C-t (mh-to-field; alternatively, C-c C-f t) moves the cursor to the ‘To:’ header field, creating it if necessary. The commands for moving to the ‘Cc:’, ‘Subject:’, ‘From:’, ‘Reply-To:’, ‘Mail-Reply-To:’, ‘Mail-Followup-To’, ‘Bcc:’, and ‘Dcc:’ header fields are similar.

One command behaves differently from the others, namely, C-c C-f C-f (mh-to-fcc; alternatively, C-c C-f f). This command will prompt you for the folder name in which to file a copy of the draft. See section Folder Selection.

Within the header of the message, the command
<TAB> (mh-letter-next-header-field-or-indent) moves between fields that are highlighted with the face mh-letter-header-field, skipping those fields listed in mh-compose-skipped-header-fields. After the last field, this command then moves point to the message body before cycling back to the first field. If point is already past the first line of the message body, then this command indents by calling indent-relative with the given prefix argument. The command S-<TAB> (mh-letter-previous-header-field) moves backwards between the fields and cycles to the body of the message after the first field. Unlike the command <TAB>, it will always take point to the last field from anywhere in the body.

If the field contains addresses (for example, ‘To:’ or ‘Cc:’) or folders (for example, ‘Fcc:’) then the command M-<TAB> (mh-letter-complete) will provide alias completion (see section Aliases). In the body of the message, M-<TAB> runs mh-letter-complete-function instead, which is set to ‘'ispell-complete-word’ by default. The command M-<TAB> (mh-letter-complete) takes a prefix argument that is passed to the mh-letter-complete-function. In addition, turn on the option mh-compose-space-does-completion-flag to use the command <SPC> (mh-letter-complete-or-space) to perform completion in the header as well; use a prefix argument to specify more than one space. Addresses are separated by a comma; when you press the comma, the command mh-letter-confirm-address flashes the alias expansion in the minibuffer if mh-alias-flash-on-comma is turned on.

Use the command C-c C-t mh-letter-toggle-header-field-display to display truncated header fields. This command is a toggle so entering it again will hide the field. This command takes a prefix argument: if negative then the field is hidden, if positive then the field is displayed (for example, C-u C-c C-t).

Be sure to leave a row of dashes or a blank line between the header and the body of the message.

The body of the message is edited as you would edit any Emacs buffer although there are a few commands and options to assist you. You can change the fill column in MH-Letter mode with the option mh-letter-fill-column. By default, this option is 72 to allow others to quote your message without line wrapping.

You’ll often include messages that were sent from user agents that haven’t yet realized that paragraphs consist of more than a single line. This makes for long lines that wrap in an ugly fashion. You’ll find that M-q (fill-paragraph) works well even on these quoted messages, even if they are nested, just as long as all of the quotes match the value of mh-ins-buf-prefix (see section Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying). For example, let’s assume you have the following in your draft:

> Hopefully this gives you an idea of what I'm currently doing. I'm \
not sure yet whether I'm completely satisfied with my setup, but    \
it's worked okay for me so far.

Running M-q on this paragraph produces:

> Hopefully this gives you an idea of what I'm currently doing. I'm not
> sure yet whether I'm completely satisfied with my setup, but it's
> worked okay for me so far.

The command C-c C-o (mh-open-line) is similar to the command C-o (open-line) in that it inserts a newline after point. It differs in that it also inserts the right number of quoting characters and spaces so that the next line begins in the same column as it was. This is useful when breaking up paragraphs in replies. For example, if this command was used when point was after the first period in the paragraph above, the result would be this:

> Hopefully this gives you an idea of what I'm currently doing.

>                                                               I'm not
> sure yet whether I'm completely satisfied with my setup, but it's
> worked okay for me so far.

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying

It is often useful to insert a snippet of text from a letter that someone mailed to provide some context for your reply. The command C-c C-y (mh-yank-cur-msg) does this by adding an attribution, yanking a portion of text from the message to which you’re replying, and inserting mh-ins-buf-prefix (‘> ’) before each line.

Michael W Thelen <thelenm@stop.mail-abuse.org> wrote:

> Hopefully this gives you an idea of what I'm currently doing. I'm not
> sure yet whether I'm completely satisfied with my setup, but it's
> worked okay for me so far.

The attribution consists of the sender’s name and email address followed by the content of the option mh-extract-from-attribution-verb. This option can be set to ‘wrote:’, ‘a √©crit:’, and ‘schrieb:’. You can also use the ‘Custom String’ menu item to enter your own verb.

The prefix "> " is the default setting for the option mh-ins-buf-prefix. I suggest that you not modify this option since it is used by many mailers and news readers: messages are far easier to read if several included messages have all been indented by the same string. This prefix is not inserted if you use one of the supercite flavors of mh-yank-behavior or you have added a mail-citation-hook as described below.

You can also turn on the mh-delete-yanked-msg-window-flag option to delete the window containing the original message after yanking it to make more room on your screen for your reply.

You can control how the message to which you are replying is yanked into your reply using mh-yank-behavior. To include the entire message, including the entire header, use ‘Body and Header(36)(37). Use ‘Body’ to yank just the body without the header. To yank only the portion of the message following the point, set this option to ‘Below Point’.

Choose ‘Invoke supercite(38) to pass the entire message and header through supercite.

If the ‘Body With Attribution’ setting is used, then the message minus the header is yanked and a simple attribution line is added at the top using the value of the option mh-extract-from-attribution-verb. This is the default.

If the ‘Invoke supercite’ or ‘Body With Attribution’ settings are used, the ‘-noformat’ argument is passed to the repl program to override a ‘-filter’ or ‘-format’ argument. These settings also have ‘Automatically’ variants that perform the action automatically when you reply so that you don’t need to use C-c C-y at all. Note that this automatic action is only performed if the show buffer matches the message being replied to. People who use the automatic variants tend to turn on the option mh-delete-yanked-msg-window-flag as well so that the show window is never displayed.

If the show buffer has a region, the option mh-yank-behavior is ignored unless its value is one of ‘Attribution’ variants in which case the attribution is added to the yanked region.

If this isn’t enough, you can gain full control over the appearance of the included text by setting mail-citation-hook to a function that modifies it. This hook is ignored if the option mh-yank-behavior is set to one of the supercite flavors. Otherwise, this option controls how much of the message is passed to the hook. The function can find the citation between point and mark and it should leave point and mark around the modified citation text for the next hook function. The standard prefix mh-ins-buf-prefix is not added if this hook is set.

For example, if you use the hook function trivial-cite (which is NOT part of Emacs), set mh-yank-behavior to ‘Body and Header’.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

9.3 Inserting Messages

Messages can be inserted with C-c C-i (mh-insert-letter). This command prompts you for the folder and message number, which defaults to the current message in that folder. It then inserts the messages, indented by mh-ins-buf-prefix (‘> ’) unless mh-yank-behavior is set to one of the supercite flavors in which case supercite is used to format the message. Certain undesirable header fields (see mh-invisible-header-fields-compiled) are removed before insertion.

If given a prefix argument (like C-u C-c C-i), the header is left intact, the message is not indented, and ‘> ’ is not inserted before each line. This command leaves the mark before the letter and point after it.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

9.4 Inserting Your Signature

You can insert your signature at the current cursor location with the command C-c C-s (mh-insert-signature).

By default, the text of your signature is taken from the file ‘~/.signature’. You can read from other sources by changing the option mh-signature-file-name. This file may contain a vCard in which case an attachment is added with the vCard.

The option mh-signature-file-name may also be a symbol, in which case that function is called. You may not want a signature separator to be added for you; instead you may want to insert one yourself. Options that you may find useful to do this include mh-signature-separator (when inserting a signature separator) and mh-signature-separator-regexp (for finding said separator). The function mh-signature-separator-p, which reports t if the buffer contains a separator, may be useful as well.

A signature separator ("-- ") will be added if the signature block does not contain one and mh-signature-separator-flag is on. It is not recommended that you change this option since various mail user agents, including MH-E, use the separator to present the signature differently, and to suppress the signature when replying or yanking a letter into a draft.

The hook mh-insert-signature-hook is run after the signature is inserted. Hook functions may access the actual name of the file or the function used to insert the signature with mh-signature-file-name.

The signature can also be inserted using Identities. See section Identities.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

9.5 Inserting Your Picture

You can insert your picture in the header of your mail message so that recipients see your face in the ‘From:’ header field if their mail user agent is sophisticated enough. In MH-E, this is done by placing your image in the file named by the option mh-x-face-file which is ‘~/.face’ by default.

If the file starts with either of the strings ‘X-Face:’, ‘Face:’ or ‘X-Image-URL:’ then the contents are added to the message header verbatim. Otherwise it is assumed that the file contains the value of the ‘X-Face:’ header field.

The ‘X-Face:’ header field, which is a low-resolution, black and white image, can be generated using the compface command. The Online X-Face Converter is a useful resource for quick conversion of images into ‘X-Face:’ header fields.

Use the make-face script to convert a JPEG image to the higher resolution, color, ‘Face:’ header field.

The URL of any image can be used for the ‘X-Image-URL:’ field and no processing of the image is required.

To prevent the setting of any of these header fields, either set mh-x-face-file to nil, or simply ensure that the file defined by this option doesn’t exist.

See section Viewing Your Mail, to see how these header fields are displayed in MH-E.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

9.6 Adding Attachments

MH-E has the capability to create multimedia messages. It uses the MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) protocol(39) The MIME protocol allows you to incorporate images, sound, video, binary files, and even commands that fetch a file with ‘ftp’ when your recipient reads the message!

If you were to create a multimedia message with plain MH commands, you would insert mhbuild or mhn directives (henceforth called MH-style directives into your draft and use the mhbuild command in nmh or mhn command in MH and GNU mailutils to expand them. MH-E works in much the same way, although it provides a handful of commands prefixed with C-c C-m to insert the directives so you don’t need to remember the syntax of them. Remember: you can always add MH-style directives by hand(40).

In addition to MH-style directives, MH-E also supports MML (MIME Meta Language) tags(41). The option mh-compose-insertion can be used to choose between them. By default, this option is set to ‘MML’ if it is supported since it provides a lot more functionality. This option can also be set to ‘MH’ if MH-style directives are preferred.

The MH-E MIME commands require a media type for each body part or attachment. For example, a PDF document is of type ‘application/pdf’ and an HTML document is of type ‘text/html’. Some commands fill in the media type for you, whereas others require you to enter one.

In the cases where MH-E can do so, it will determine the media type automatically. It uses the file command to do this. Failing that, the Emacs function mailcap-mime-types is used to provide a list from which to choose. This function usually reads the file ‘/etc/mime.types’.

Whether the media type is chosen automatically, or you choose it from a list, use the type that seems to match best the file that you are including. In the case of binaries, the media type ‘application/x-executable’ can be useful. If you can’t find an appropriate media type, use ‘text/plain’ for text messages and ‘application/octet-stream’ for everything else.

You are also sometimes asked for a content description. This is simply an optional brief phrase, in your own words, that describes the object. If you don’t care to enter a content description, just press return and none will be included; however, a reader may skip over multimedia fields unless the content description is compelling.

You can also create your own MIME body parts. In the following example, I describe how you can create and edit a ‘text/enriched’ body part to liven up your plain text messages with boldface, underlining, and italics. I include an Emacs function which inserts enriched text tags.

(defvar enriched-text-types '(("b" . "bold") ("i" . "italic")
                              ("u" . "underline")
                              ("s" . "smaller") ("B" . "bigger")
                              ("f" . "fixed")
                              ("c" . "center"))
  "Alist of (final-character . tag) choices for add-enriched-text.
Additional types can be found in RFC 1563.")

(defun add-enriched-text (begin end)
  "Add enriched text tags around region.
The tag used comes from the list enriched-text-types and is
specified by the last keystroke of the command.  When called from Lisp,
arguments are BEGIN and END."
  (interactive "r")
  ;; Set type to the tag indicated by the last keystroke.
  (let ((type (cdr (assoc (char-to-string (logior last-input-char ?`))
                          enriched-text-types))))
    (save-restriction               ; restores state from narrow-to-region
      (narrow-to-region begin end)      ; narrow view to region
      (goto-char (point-min))           ; move to beginning of text
      (insert "<" type ">")             ; insert beginning tag
      (goto-char (point-max))           ; move to end of text
      (insert "</" type ">"))))         ; insert terminating tag
Emacs function for entering enriched text

To use the function add-enriched-text, first add it to ‘~/.emacs’ and create key bindings for it (see section Composing).

Then, in your plain text message, set the mark with C-@ or C-<SPC>, type in the text to be highlighted, and type C-c t b. This adds ‘<bold>’ where you set the mark and adds ‘</bold>’ at the location of your cursor, giving you something like: ‘You should be <bold>very</bold>’.

Before sending this message, use C-c C-m C-m (mh-mml-to-mime)(42) to add MIME header fields. Then replace ‘text/plain’ with ‘text/enriched’ in the ‘Content-Type:’ header field.

You may also be interested in investigating sgml-mode.

Including Files

Binaries, images, sound, and video can be inserted in your message with the command C-c C-m C-i (mh-compose-insertion). You are prompted for the filename containing the object, the media type if it cannot be determined automatically, and a content description. If you’re using MH-style directives, you will also be prompted for additional attributes.

Forwarding Multimedia Messages

Mail may be forwarded with MIME using the command C-c C-m C-f (mh-compose-forward). You are prompted for a content description, the name of the folder in which the messages to forward are located, and a range of messages, which defaults to the current message in that folder. See section Ranges.

Including an FTP Reference

You can have your message initiate an ftp transfer when the recipient reads the message. To do this, use the command C-c C-m C-g (mh-mh-compose-anon-ftp). You are prompted for the remote host and filename, the media type, and the content description.

Including tar Files

If the remote file is a compressed tar file, you can use C-c C-m C-t (mh-mh-compose-external-compressed-tar). Then, in addition to retrieving the file via anonymous ftp as per the command C-c C-m C-g (mh-mh-compose-anon-ftp), the file will also be uncompressed and untarred. You are prompted for the remote host and filename and the content description.

Including Other External Files

The command C-c C-m C-x (mh-mh-compose-external-type) is a general utility for referencing external files. In fact, all of the other commands that insert tags to access external files call this command. You are prompted for the access type, remote host and filename, and content type. If you provide a prefix argument, you are also prompted for a content description, attributes, parameters, and a comment.

Previewing Multimedia Messages

When you are finished editing a MIME message, it might look like this:

3 t08/24  root               received fax files on Wed Aug 24 11:00:
4+t08/24  To:wohler          Test<<This is a test message to get the





--:%%  {+inbox} 4 msgs (1-4)   Bot L4     (MH-Folder Show)---------------
To: wohler
cc:
Subject: Test of MIME
--------
Here is the SETI@Home logo:

<#part type="image/x-xpm" filename="~/lib/images/setiathome.xpm"
disposition=inline description="SETI@home logo">
<#/part>
--:**  {draft}   All L8     (MH-Letter)----------------------------------

MH-E MIME draft

Typically, you send a message with attachments just like any other message (see section Sending a Message).

However, you may take a sneak preview of the MIME encoding if you wish by running the command C-c C-m C-m (mh-mml-to-mime). The following screen shows the MIME encoding specified by the tags. You can see why mail user agents are usually built to hide these details from the user.

To: wohler
cc:
Subject: Test of MIME
X-Mailer: MH-E 8.1; nmh 1.1; GNU Emacs 23.1
MIME-Version: 1.0
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="=-=-="
--------
--=-=-=

Here is the SETI@Home logo:


--=-=-=
Content-Type: image/x-xpm
Content-Disposition: inline; filename=setiathome.xpm
Content-Transfer-Encoding: base64
Content-Description: SETI@home logo

LyogWFBNICovCnN0YXRpYyBjaGFyICogc2V0aWF0aG9tZV94cG1bXSA9IHsKIjQ1IDQ1IDc2N
--:--  {draft}   Top L1     (MH-Letter)----------------------------------

MH-E MIME draft ready to send

This action can be undone by running C-_ (undo).

If you’re using MH-style directives, use C-c C-e (mh-mh-to-mime) instead of C-c C-m C-m. This runs the command mhbuild (mhn) on the message which expands the tags(43). This action can be undone by running C-c C-m C-u (mh-mh-to-mime-undo), which works by reverting to a backup file. You are prompted to confirm this action, but you can avoid the confirmation by adding an argument (for example, C-u C-c C-m C-u).

If you wish to pass additional arguments to mhbuild (mhn) to affect how it builds your message, use the option mh-mh-to-mime-args. For example, you can build a consistency check into the message by setting mh-mh-to-mime-args to ‘-check’. The recipient of your message can then run ‘mhbuild -check’ on the message—mhbuild (mhn) will complain if the message has been corrupted on the way. The command C-c C-e only consults this option when given a prefix argument (as in C-u C-c C-e).

The hook mh-mh-to-mime-hook is called after the message has been formatted by C-c C-e.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages

MH-E can sign and encrypt messages as defined in RFC 3156. If you should choose to sign or encrypt your message, use one of the following commands to do so any time before sending your message.

The command C-c C-m C-s (mh-mml-secure-message-sign) inserts the following tag:

<#secure method=pgpmime mode=sign>

This is used to sign your message digitally. Likewise, the command C-c C-m C-e (mh-mml-secure-message-encrypt) inserts the following tag:

<#secure method=pgpmime mode=encrypt>

This is used to encrypt your message. Finally, the command C-c C-m s e (mh-mml-secure-message-signencrypt) inserts the following tag:

<#secure method=pgpmime mode=signencrypt>

This is used to sign and encrypt your message. In each of these cases, a proper multipart message is created for you when you send the message. Use the command C-c C-m C-n (mh-mml-unsecure-message) to remove these tags. Use a prefix argument (as in C-u C-c C-m s e) to be prompted for one of the possible security methods (see mh-mml-method-default).

The option mh-mml-method-default is used to select between a variety of mail security mechanisms. The default is ‘PGP (MIME)’ if it is supported; otherwise, the default is ‘None’. Other mechanisms include vanilla ‘PGP’ and ‘S/MIME’.

The ‘pgg’ customization group may have some settings which may interest you. See The PGG Manual.

In particular, I turn on the option pgg-encrypt-for-me so that all messages I encrypt are encrypted with my public key as well. If you keep a copy of all of your outgoing mail with a ‘Fcc:’ header field, this setting is vital so that you can read the mail you write!


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

9.8 Checking Recipients

The command C-c C-w (mh-check-whom) expands aliases so you can check the actual address(es) in the alias. A new buffer named ‘*MH-E Recipients*’ is created with the output of whom (see section Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers)(44).


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

9.9 Sending a Message

When you are all through editing a message, you send it with the command C-c C-c (mh-send-letter). You can give a prefix argument (as in C-u C-c C-c) to monitor the first stage of the delivery; this output can be found in a buffer called ‘*MH-E Mail Delivery*’ (see section Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers).

The hook mh-before-send-letter-hook is run at the beginning of the command C-c C-c. For example, if you want to check your spelling in your message before sending, add the function ispell-message.

In case the MH send program(45) is installed under a different name, use mh-send-prog to tell MH-E the name.

The hook mh-annotate-msg-hook is run after annotating the message and scan line (see section Sending Mail).


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

9.10 Killing the Draft

If for some reason you are not happy with the draft, you can use the command C-c C-q (mh-fully-kill-draft) to kill the draft buffer and delete the draft message. Use the command C-x k (kill-buffer) if you don’t want to delete the draft message.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

10 Aliases

MH aliases are used in the same way in MH-E as they are in MH. Any alias listed as a recipient will be expanded when the message is sent. This chapter discusses other things you can do with aliases in MH-E.

The following commands are available in MH-Letter mode with the exception of mh-alias-reload which can be called from anywhere.

<SPC>

Perform completion or insert space (mh-letter-complete-or-space).

M-<TAB>

Perform completion on header field or word preceding point (mh-letter-complete).

mh-alias-apropos

Show all aliases or addresses that match a regular expression.

mh-alias-grab-from-field

Add alias for the sender of the current message

mh-alias-reload

Reload MH aliases.

The ‘mh-alias’ customization group contains options associated with aliases.

mh-alias-completion-ignore-case-flag

On means don’t consider case significant in MH alias completion (default: ‘on’).

mh-alias-expand-aliases-flag

On means to expand aliases entered in the minibuffer (default: ‘off’).

mh-alias-flash-on-comma

Specify whether to flash address or warn on translation (default: ‘Flash but Don't Warn If No Alias’).

mh-alias-insert-file

Filename used to store a new MH-E alias (default: ‘Use Aliasfile Profile Component’).

mh-alias-insertion-location

Specifies where new aliases are entered in alias files (default: ‘Alphabetical’).

mh-alias-local-users

If ‘on’, local users are added to alias completion (default: ‘on’).

mh-alias-local-users-prefix

String prefixed to the real names of users from the password file (default: "local.".

mh-alias-passwd-gecos-comma-separator-flag

On means the GECOS field in the password file uses a comma separator (default: ‘on’).

The following hook is available.

mh-alias-reloaded-hook

Hook run by mh-alias-reload after loading aliases (default: nil).

Adding Addresses to Draft

You can use aliases when you are adding recipients to a message.

In order to use minibuffer prompting for recipients and the subject line in the minibuffer, turn on the option mh-compose-prompt-flag (see section Composing), and use the <TAB> (minibuffer-complete) command to complete aliases (and optionally local logins) when prompted for the recipients. Turn on the option mh-alias-expand-aliases-flag if you want these aliases to be expanded to their respective addresses in the draft.

Otherwise, you can complete aliases in the header of the draft with M-<TAB> (mh-letter-complete) or <SPC> (mh-letter-complete-or-space).

As MH ignores case in the aliases, so too does MH-E. However, you may turn off the option mh-alias-completion-ignore-case-flag to make case significant which can be used to segregate completion of your aliases. You might use uppercase for mailing lists and lowercase for people. For example, you might have:

mark.baushke: Mark Baushke <mdb@stop.mail-abuse.org>
MH-E: MH-E Mailing List <mh-e-devel@stop.mail-abuse.org>

When this option is turned off, if you were to type M in the ‘To:’ field and then M-<TAB>, then you’d get the list; if you started with m and then entered M-<TAB>, then you’d get Mark’s address. Note that this option affects completion only. If you were to enter Mark.Baushke, it would still be identified with your ‘mark.baushke’ alias.

To verify that the alias you’ve entered is valid, the alias will be displayed in the minibuffer when you type a comma (mh-letter-confirm-address or mh-alias-minibuffer-confirm-address if the option mh-compose-prompt-flag is turned on). See section Composing. This behavior can be controlled with the option mh-alias-flash-on-comma which provides three choices: ‘Flash but Don't Warn If No Alias’, ‘Flash and Warn If No Alias’, and ‘Don't Flash Nor Warn If No Alias’.

For another way to verify the alias expansion, see Checking Recipients.

Loading Aliases

MH-E loads aliases for completion and folder name hints from various places. It uses the MH command ali(46) to read aliases from the files listed in the profile component ‘Aliasfile:’ as well as system-wide aliases (for example, ‘/etc/nmh/MailAliases’).

In addition, aliases are created from ‘/etc/passwd’ entries with a user ID larger than a magical number, typically 200. This can be a handy tool on a machine where you and co-workers exchange messages. These aliases have the form ‘local.first.last’ if a real name is present in the password file. Otherwise, the alias will have the form ‘local.login’.

The prefix ‘local.’ can be modified via the option mh-alias-local-users-prefix. This option can also be set to ‘Use Login’.

For example, consider the following password file entry:

psg:x:1000:1000:Peter S Galbraith,,,:/home/psg:/bin/tcsh

The following settings of option mh-alias-local-users-prefix will produce the associated aliases:

"local."

local.peter.galbraith

""

peter.galbraith

Use Login

psg

In the example above, commas are used to separate different values within the so-called GECOS field. This is a fairly common usage. However, in the rare case that the GECOS field in your password file is not separated by commas and whose contents may contain commas, you can turn the option mh-alias-passwd-gecos-comma-separator-flag off.

If you’re on a system with thousands of users you don’t know, and the loading of local aliases slows MH-E down noticeably, then the local alias feature can be disabled by turning off the option mh-alias-local-users. This option also takes a string which is executed to generate the password file. For example, use ‘ypcat passwd’ to obtain the NIS password file.

Since aliases are updated frequently, MH-E reloads aliases automatically whenever an alias lookup occurs if an alias source has changed. However, you can reload your aliases manually by calling the command M-x mh-alias-reload directly. This command runs mh-alias-reloaded-hook after the aliases have been loaded.

Adding Aliases

In the past, you have manually added aliases to your alias file(s) listed in your ‘Aliasfile:’ profile component. MH-E provides other methods for maintaining your alias file(s).

You can use the M-x mh-alias-add-alias command which will prompt you for the alias and address that you would like to add. If the alias exists already, you will have the choice of inserting the new alias before or after the old alias. In the former case, this alias will be used when sending mail to this alias. In the latter case, the alias serves as an additional folder name hint when filing messages (see section Folder Selection).

Earlier, the alias prefix ‘local’ was presented. You can use other prefixes to organize your aliases or disambiguate entries. You might use prefixes for locales, jobs, or activities. For example, I have:

; Work
attensity.don.mitchell: Don Mitchell <dmitchell@stop.mail-abuse.com>
isharp.don.mitchell: Don Mitchell <donaldsmitchell@stop.mail-abuse.com>
...
; Sport
diving.ken.mayer: Ken Mayer <kmayer@stop.mail-abuse.com>
sailing.mike.maloney: Mike Maloney <mmaloney@stop.mail-abuse.com>
...
; Personal
ariane.kolkmann: Ariane Kolkmann <ArianeKolkmann@stop.mail-abuse.com>
...

Using prefixes instead of postfixes helps you explore aliases during completion. If you forget the name of an old dive buddy, you can enter ‘div’ and then <SPC> to get a listing of all your dive buddies.

An alias for the sender of the current message is added automatically by clicking on the ‘Grab From alias’ tool bar button or by running the M-x mh-alias-grab-from-field command. Aliases for other recipients of the current message are added by placing your cursor over the desired recipient and giving the M-x mh-alias-add-address-under-point command.

The options mh-alias-insert-file and mh-alias-insertion-location controls how and where these aliases are inserted.

The default setting of option mh-alias-insert-file is ‘Use Aliasfile Profile Component’. This option can also hold the name of a file or a list a file names. If this option is set to a list of file names, or the ‘Aliasfile:’ profile component contains more than one file name, MH-E will prompt for one of them.

The option mh-alias-insertion-location is set to ‘Alphabetical’ by default. If you organize your alias file in other ways, then the settings ‘Top’ and ‘Bottom’ might be more appropriate.

Querying Aliases

If you can’t quite remember an alias, you can use M-x mh-alias-apropos to show all aliases or addresses that match a regular expression (see the section Syntax of Regular Expressions in The GNU Emacs Manual).


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

11 Identities

MH-E supports the concept of multiple personalities or identities. This means that you can easily have a different header and signature at home and at work.

A couple of commands are used to insert identities in MH-Letter mode which are also found in the ‘Identity’ menu.

C-c C-d

Insert fields specified by given identity (mh-insert-identity).

C-c M-d

Insert custom fields if recipient found in mh-auto-fields-list (mh-insert-auto-fields).

The ‘mh-identity’ customization group contains the following options.

mh-auto-fields-list

List of recipients for which header lines are automatically inserted (default: nil).

mh-auto-fields-prompt-flag

On means to prompt before sending if fields inserted (default: ‘on’)

mh-identity-default

Default identity to use when mh-letter-mode is called (default: ‘None’).

mh-identity-handlers

Handler functions for fields in mh-identity-list.

mh-identity-list

List of identities (default: nil).

Some of the common header fields that people change depending on the context are the ‘From:’ and ‘Organization:’ fields, as well as the signature.

This is done by customizing the option mh-identity-list. In the customization buffer for this option, click on the ‘INS’ button and enter a label such as ‘Home’ or ‘Work’. Then click on the ‘INS’ button with the label ‘Add at least one item below’. The ‘Value Menu’ has the following menu items:

From Field

Specify an alternate ‘From:’ header field. You must include a valid email address. A standard format is ‘First Last <login@host.domain>’. If you use an initial with a period, then you must quote your name as in ‘"First I. Last" <login@host.domain>’.

Organization Field

People usually list the name of the company where they work here.

Other Field

Set any arbitrary header field and value here. Unless the header field is a standard one, precede the name of your field’s label with ‘X-’, as in ‘X-Fruit-of-the-Day:’.

Attribution Verb

This value overrides the setting of mh-extract-from-attribution-verb. See section Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying.

Signature

Set your signature with this item. You can specify the contents of mh-signature-file-name, a file, or a function. See section Inserting Your Signature.

GPG Key ID

Specify a different key to sign or encrypt messages.

You can select the identities you have added via the menu called ‘Identity’ in the MH-Letter buffer. You can also use C-c C-d (mh-insert-identity). To clear the fields and signature added by the identity, select the ‘None’ identity.

The ‘Identity’ menu contains two other items to save you from having to set the identity on every message. The menu item ‘Set Default for Session’ can be used to set the default identity to the current identity until you exit Emacs. The menu item ‘Save as Default’ sets the option mh-identity-default to the current identity setting. You can also customize the option mh-identity-default in the usual fashion. If you find that you need to add another identity, the menu item ‘Customize Identities’ is available for your convenience.

The option mh-auto-fields-list can also be used to set the identity depending on the recipient to provide even more control. To customize mh-auto-fields-list, click on the ‘INS’ button and enter a regular expression for the recipient’s address (see the section Syntax of Regular Expressions in The GNU Emacs Manual). Click on the ‘INS’ button with the ‘Add at least one item below’ label. The ‘Value Menu’ contains the following menu items:

Identity

Select an identity from those configured in mh-identity-list. All of the information for that identity will be added if the recipient matches.

Fcc Field

Insert an ‘Fcc:’ header field with the folder you provide. When you send the message, MH will put a copy of your message in this folder.

Mail-Followup-To Field

Insert an ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ header field with the recipients you provide. If the recipient’s mail user agent supports this header field(47), then their replies will go to the addresses listed. This is useful if their replies go both to the list and to you and you don’t have a mechanism to suppress duplicates. If you reply to someone not on the list, you must either remove the ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ field, or ensure the recipient is also listed there so that he receives replies to your reply.

Other Field

Other header fields may be added using this menu item.

These fields can only be added after the recipient is known. Because you can continue to add recipients as you edit the draft, MH-E waits until the message is sent to perform the auto-insertions. This seems strange at first, but you’ll get used to it. There are two ways to help you feel that the desired fields are added. The first is the action when the message is sent: if any fields are added automatically, you are given a chance to see and to confirm these fields before the message is actually sent. You can do away with this confirmation by turning off the option mh-auto-fields-prompt-flag. The second method is manual: once the header contains one or more recipients, you may run the command C-c M-d (mh-insert-auto-fields) or choose the ‘Identity -> Insert Auto Fields’ menu item to insert these fields manually. However, if you use this command, the automatic insertion when the message is sent is disabled.

You should avoid using the same header field in mh-auto-fields-list and mh-identity-list definitions that may apply to the same message as the result is undefined.

The option mh-identity-handlers is used to change the way that fields, signatures, and attributions in mh-identity-list are added. To customize mh-identity-handlers, replace the name of an existing handler function associated with the field you want to change with the name of a function you have written. You can also click on an ‘INS’ button and insert a field of your choice and the name of the function you have written to handle it.

The ‘Field’ field can be any field that you’ve used in your mh-identity-list. The special fields ‘:attribution-verb’, ‘:signature’, or ‘:pgg-default-user-id’ are used for the mh-identity-list choices ‘Attribution Verb’, ‘Signature’, and ‘GPG Key ID’ respectively.

The handler associated with the ‘:default’ field is used when no other field matches.

The handler functions are passed two or three arguments: the field itself (for example, ‘From’), or one of the special fields (for example, ‘:signature’), and the action ‘'remove’ or ‘'add’. If the action is ‘'add’, an additional argument containing the value for the field is given.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

12 The Speedbar

You can also use the speedbar (see the section Speedbar Frames in The GNU Emacs Manual) to view your folders. To bring up the speedbar, run M-x speedbar <RET>. You will see a new frame appear with all of your MH folders. Folders with unseen messages appear in boldface. Click on a folder name with mouse-2 to visit that folder in a similar fashion to the command F v (mh-visit-folder) (see section Organizing Your Mail with Folders). Click on the ‘+’ icon to expand and view the sub-folders of that folder.

The speedbar can be manipulated with the keyboard as well. Use the Emacs navigational keys (like the arrow keys, or C-n) to move the cursor over the desired folder and then use the shortcuts for the menu items listed in the table below.

Visit Folder (<RET>)

Visits the selected folder just as if you had used F v (mh-speed-view).

Expand Nested Folders (+)

Expands the selected folder in the speedbar, exposing the children folders inside it (mh-speed-expand-folder).

Contract Nested Folders (-)

Contracts or collapses the selected folder in the speedbar, hiding the children folders inside it (mh-speed-contract-folder).

Refresh Speedbar (r)

Regenerates the list of folders in the speedbar. Run this command if you’ve added or deleted a folder, or want to update the unseen message count before the next automatic update (mh-speed-refresh).

You can click on mouse-3 to bring up a context menu that contains these items. Dismiss the speedbar with C-x 5 0 (delete-frame).

The MH-E speedbar uses the MH command flists(48) to generate the list of folders. The ‘mh-speedbar’ customization group contains the following option which controls how often the speedbar calls flists.

mh-speed-update-interval

Time between speedbar updates in seconds (default: 60). Set to 0 to disable automatic update.

You can modify the appearance of the folders in the speedbar by customizing the following faces.

mh-speedbar-folder

Basic folder face.

mh-speedbar-folder-with-unseen-messages

Folder face when folder contains unread messages.

mh-speedbar-selected-folder

Selected folder face.

mh-speedbar-selected-folder-with-unseen-messages

Selected folder face when folder contains unread messages.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

13 The Menu Bar

For those of you who prefer to mouse and menu instead of using the meta-coke-bottle-bucky keys, MH-E provides menu items for most of its functions. The MH-Folder buffer adds the ‘Folder’, ‘Message’, and ‘Sequence’ menus. The MH-Letter buffer adds the ‘Identity’ and ‘Letter’ menus. The MH-Search buffer adds the ‘Search’ menu. There’s no need to list the actual items here, as you can more easily see them for yourself, and the functions are already described elsewhere in this manual.

For a description of the menu bar, please see the section The Menu Bar in The GNU Emacs Manual.

The Emacs manual describes how to get help for a particular menu item. You can also look up a menu item in the index of this manual in two ways: all of the menu items are listed alphabetically, and you can also browse all of the items under the index entry ‘menu item’.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

14 The Tool Bar

Emacs also provides a graphical tool bar. For a description of the tool bar, please see the section Tool Bars in The GNU Emacs Manual.

MH-E adds several icons to this tool bar; you can modify the MH-E aspects of the tool bar via the ‘mh-tool-bar’ customization group.

mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons

List of buttons to include in MH-Folder tool bar (default: a checklist too long to list here).

mh-tool-bar-letter-buttons

List of buttons to include in MH-Letter tool bar (default: a checklist too long to list here).

mh-tool-bar-search-function

Function called by the tool bar search button (default: mh-search).

mh-xemacs-tool-bar-position

Tool bar location (default: ‘Same As Default Tool Bar’).

mh-xemacs-use-tool-bar-flag

If ‘on’, use tool bar (default: ‘on’, if supported).

In GNU Emacs, icons for some of MH-E’s functions are added to the tool bar. In XEmacs, you have the opportunity to create a separate tool bar for the MH-E icons.

In either case, you can select which of these functions you’d like to see by customizing the options mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons and mh-tool-bar-letter-buttons. As you probably guessed, the former customizes the tool bar in MH-Folder mode and the latter in MH-Letter mode. Both of these options present you with a list of functions; check the functions whose icons you want to see and clear the check boxes for those you don’t.

The function associated with the searching icon can be set via the option mh-tool-bar-search-function. By default, this is set to mh-search. See section Searching Through Messages. You can also choose ‘Other Function’ from the ‘Value Menu’ and enter a function of your own choosing.

XEmacs provides a couple of extra options. The first, mh-xemacs-use-tool-bar-flag, controls whether to show the MH-E icons at all. By default, this option is turned on if the window system supports tool bars. If your system doesn’t support tool bars, then you won’t be able to turn on this option.

The second extra option is mh-xemacs-tool-bar-position which controls the placement of the tool bar along the four edges of the frame. You can choose from one of ‘Same As Default Tool Bar’, ‘Top’, ‘Bottom’, ‘Left’, or ‘Right’. If this variable is set to anything other than ‘Same As Default Tool Bar’ and the default tool bar is in a different location, then two tool bars will be displayed: the MH-E tool bar and the default tool bar.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

15 Searching Through Messages

Earlier, the command F s (mh-search) was introduced which helps you find messages that lie buried in your folders (see section Organizing Your Mail with Folders). This chapter covers this command in more detail. Several commands are used to compose the search criteria and to start searching. A couple of them can be found in the ‘Search’ menu.

C-c ?

Display cheat sheet for the MH-E commands (mh-help).

C-c C-c

Find messages using mh-search-program (mh-index-do-search).

C-c C-p

Find messages using pick (mh-pick-do-search).

C-c ?

Display cheat sheet for the MH-E commands (mh-help).

C-c C-f a
C-c C-f C-a

Move to ‘Mail-Reply-To:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f b
C-c C-f C-b

Move to ‘Bcc:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f c
C-c C-f C-c

Move to ‘Cc:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f d
C-c C-f C-d

Move to ‘Dcc:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f f
C-c C-f C-f

Move to ‘Fcc:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f l
C-c C-f C-l

Move to ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f m
C-c C-f C-m

Move to ‘From:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f r
C-c C-f C-r

Move to ‘Reply-To:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f s
C-c C-f C-s

Move to ‘Subject:’ header field (mh-to-field).

C-c C-f t
C-c C-f C-t

Move to ‘To:’ header field (mh-to-field).

Another few commands are available in the MH-Folder buffer resulting from a search.

<TAB>

Jump to the next folder marker (mh-index-next-folder).

S-<TAB>

Jump to the previous folder marker (mh-index-previous-folder).

v

Visit original folder from where the message at point was found (mh-index-visit-folder).

There is one option from the ‘mh-search’ customization group used in searching.

mh-search-program

Search program that MH-E shall use (default: ‘Auto-detect’).

The following hook is available.

mh-search-mode-hook

Hook run upon entry to mh-search-mode (default: nil).

The following face is available.

mh-search-folder

Folder heading face in MH-Folder buffers created by searches.

The command F s (mh-search-folder) helps you find messages in your entire corpus of mail. You can search for messages to or from a particular person or about a particular subject. In fact, you can also search for messages containing selected strings in any arbitrary header field or any string found within the messages.

Out of the box, MH-E uses pick to find messages. With a little extra effort, you can set an indexing program which rewards you with extremely quick results. The drawback is that sometimes the index does not contain the words you’re looking for. You can still use pick in these situations.

You are prompted for the folder to search. This can be ‘all’ to search all folders. Note that the search works recursively on the listed folder.

Next, an MH-Search buffer appears where you can enter search criteria.

From:
To:
Cc:
Date:
Subject:
--------
#








--:**  search-pattern   All L7     (MH-Search)---------------------------
Type C-c C-c to search messages, C-c C-p to use pick, C-c ? for help

Search window

Edit this template by entering your search criteria in an appropriate header field that is already there, or create a new field yourself. If the string you’re looking for could be anywhere in a message, then place the string underneath the row of dashes.

As an example, let’s say that we want to find messages from Ginnean about horseback riding in the Kosciusko National Park (Australia) during January, 1994. Normally we would start with a broad search and narrow it down if necessary to produce a manageable amount of data, but we’ll cut to the chase and create a fairly restrictive set of criteria as follows:

From: ginnean
To:
Cc:
Date: Jan 1994
Subject:
--------
horse
kosciusko

As with MH-Letter mode, MH-Search provides commands like C-c C-f C-t (mh-to-field) to help you fill in the blanks. See section Editing the Message.

If you find that you do the same thing over and over when editing the search template, you may wish to bind some shortcuts to keys. This can be done with the variable mh-search-mode-hook, which is called when F s is run on a new pattern.

To perform the search, type C-c C-c (mh-index-do-search). Sometimes you’re searching for text that is either not indexed, or hasn’t been indexed yet. In this case you can override the default method with the pick method by running the command C-c C-p (mh-pick-do-search).

The messages that are found are put in a temporary sub-folder of ‘+mhe-index’ and are displayed in an MH-Folder buffer. This buffer is special because it displays messages from multiple folders; each set of messages from a given folder has a heading with the folder name. The appearance of the heading can be modified by customizing the face mh-search-folder. You can jump back and forth between the headings using the commands <TAB> (mh-index-next-folder) and S-<TAB> (mh-index-previous-folder).

In addition, the command v (mh-index-visit-folder) can be used to visit the folder of the message at point. Initially, only the messages that matched the search criteria are displayed in the folder. While the temporary buffer has its own set of message numbers, the actual messages numbers are shown in the visited folder. Thus, the command v is useful to find the actual message number of an interesting message, or to view surrounding messages with the command F r mh-rescan-folder. See section Organizing Your Mail with Folders.

Because this folder is temporary, you’ll probably get in the habit of killing it when you’re done with F k (mh-kill-folder). See section Organizing Your Mail with Folders.

You can regenerate the results by running F s with a prefix argument.

Note: This command uses an ‘X-MHE-Checksum:’ header field to cache the MD5 checksum of a message. This means that if an incoming message already contains an ‘X-MHE-Checksum:’ field, that message might not be found by this command. The following procmail recipe avoids this problem by renaming the existing header field:

:0 wf
| formail -R "X-MHE-Checksum" "X-Old-MHE-Checksum"

See section Limiting Display, for an alternative interface to searching.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches

The command F s (mh-search) runs the command defined by the option mh-search-program. The default value is ‘Auto-detect’ which means that MH-E will automatically choose one of swish++, swish-e, mairix, namazu, pick and grep in that order. If, for example, you have both swish++ and mairix installed and you want to use mairix, then you can set this option to ‘mairix’.

The following sub-sections describe how to set up the various indexing programs to use with MH-E.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

15.1.1 swish++

In the examples below, replace ‘/home/user/Mail’ with the path to your MH directory.

First create the directory ‘/home/user/Mail/.swish++’. Then create the file ‘/home/user/Mail/.swish++/swish++.conf’ with the following contents:

IncludeMeta         Bcc Cc Comments Content-Description From Keywords
IncludeMeta         Newsgroups Resent-To Subject To
IncludeMeta         Message-Id References In-Reply-To
IncludeFile         Mail    *
IndexFile           /home/user/Mail/.swish++/swish++.index

Use the following command line to generate the swish index. Run this daily from cron:

find /home/user/Mail -path /home/user/Mail/mhe-index -prune \
                     -o -path /home/user/Mail/.swish++ -prune \
                     -o -name "[0-9]*" -print \
    | index -c /home/user/Mail/.swish++/swish++.conf -

This command does not index the folders that hold the results of your searches in ‘+mhe-index’ since they tend to be ephemeral and the original messages are indexed anyway.

On some systems (Debian GNU/Linux, for example), use index++ instead of index.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

15.1.2 swish

In the examples below, replace ‘/home/user/Mail’ with the path to your MH directory.

First create the directory ‘/home/user/Mail/.swish’. Then create the file ‘/home/user/Mail/.swish/config’ with the following contents:

DefaultContents TXT*
IndexDir /home/user/Mail
IndexFile /home/user/Mail/.swish/index
IndexName "Mail Index"
IndexDescription "Mail Index"
IndexPointer "http://nowhere"
IndexAdmin "nobody"
#MetaNames automatic
IndexReport 3
FollowSymLinks no
UseStemming no
IgnoreTotalWordCountWhenRanking yes
WordCharacters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789-
BeginCharacters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
EndCharacters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789
IgnoreLimit 50 1000
IndexComments 0
FileRules filename contains \D
FileRules pathname contains /home/user/Mail/.swish
FileRules pathname contains /home/user/Mail/mhe-index
FileRules filename is index

This configuration does not index the folders that hold the results of your searches in ‘+mhe-index’ since they tend to be ephemeral and the original messages are indexed anyway.

If there are any directories you would like to ignore, append lines like the following to ‘config’:

FileRules pathname contains /home/user/Mail/scripts

Use the following command line to generate the swish index. Run this daily from cron:

swish-e -c /home/user/Mail/.swish/config

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

15.1.3 mairix

In the examples below, replace ‘~/Mail’ with the path to your MH directory.

First create the directory ‘~/Mail/.mairix’. Then create the file ‘~/Mail/.mairix/config’ with the following contents:

base=~/Mail

# List of folders that should be indexed. 3 dots at the end means there
# are subfolders within the folder
mh=archive...:inbox:drafts:news:sent:trash

mformat=mh
database=~/Mail/.mairix/database

Use the following command line to generate the mairix index. Run this daily from cron:

mairix -f ~/Mail/.mairix/config

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

15.1.4 namazu

In the examples below, replace ‘/home/user/Mail’ with the path to your MH directory.

First create the directory ‘/home/user/Mail/.namazu’. Then create the file ‘/home/user/Mail/.namazu/mknmzrc’ with the following contents:

package conf;  # Don't remove this line!
$ADDRESS = 'user@localhost';
$ALLOW_FILE = "[0-9]*";
$EXCLUDE_PATH = "^/home/user/Mail/(mhe-index|spam)";

This configuration does not index the folders that hold the results of your searches in ‘+mhe-index’ since they tend to be ephemeral and the original messages are indexed anyway.

Use the following command line to generate the namazu index. Run this daily from cron:

mknmz -f /home/user/Mail/.namazu/mknmzrc -O /home/user/Mail/.namazu \
      -q /home/user/Mail

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

15.1.5 pick

This search method does not require any setup.

Read pick(1) or the section Finding Messages with pick in the MH book to find out more about how to enter the criteria.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

15.1.6 grep

This search method does not require any setup.

Unlike the other search methods, this method does not use the MH-Search buffer. Instead, you simply enter a regular expression in the minibuffer. For help in constructing regular expressions, see your man page for grep.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

16 Viewing Message Threads

MH-E groups messages by threads which are messages that are part of the same discussion and usually all have the same ‘Subject:’ header field. Other ways to organize messages in a folder include limiting (see section Limiting Display) or using full-text indexed searches (see section Searching Through Messages).

A thread begins with a single message called a root. All replies to the same message are siblings of each other. Any message that has replies to it is an ancestor of those replies.

There are several commands that you can use to navigate and operate on threads.

T ?

Display cheat sheet for the commands of the current prefix in minibuffer (mh-prefix-help).

T o

Refile (output) thread into folder (mh-thread-refile).

T d

Delete thread (mh-thread-delete).

T t

Toggle threaded view of folder (mh-toggle-threads).

T n

Display next sibling (mh-thread-next-sibling).

T p

Display previous sibling (mh-thread-previous-sibling).

T u

Display ancestor of current message (mh-thread-ancestor).

The ‘mh-thread’ customization group contains one option.

mh-show-threads-flag

On means new folders start in threaded mode (default: ‘off’).

Threading large number of messages can be time consuming so the option mh-show-threads-flag is turned off by default. If you turn on this option, then threading will be done only if the number of messages being threaded is less than mh-large-folder. In any event, threading can be turned on (and off) with the command T t (mh-toggle-threads).

There are a few commands to help you navigate threads. If you do not care for the way a particular thread has turned, you can move up the chain of messages with the command T u (mh-thread-ancestor. At any point you can use T n (mh-thread-next-sibling or T p (mh-thread-previous-sibling) to jump to the next or previous sibling, skipping the sub-threads. The command T u can also take a prefix argument to jump to the message that started everything.

There are threaded equivalents for the commands that delete and refile messages. For example, T o (mh-thread-refile) refiles the current message and all its children. Similarly, the command T d (mh-thread-delete) deletes the current message and all its children. These commands do not refile or delete sibling messages. See section Navigating, for a description of the similar command k (mh-delete-subject-or-thread).

If you find that threading is too slow, it may be that you have mh-large-folder set too high. Also, threading is one of the few features of MH-E that really benefits from compiling. If you haven’t compiled MH-E, I encourage you to do so(49).


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

17 Limiting Display

Another way to organize messages in a folder besides threading (see section Viewing Message Threads) or using full-text indexed searches (see section Searching Through Messages) is by limiting the folder display to messages that are similar to the current message.

/ ?

Display cheat sheet for the commands of the current prefix in minibuffer (mh-prefix-help).

/ '

Limit to messages in the ‘tick’ sequence (mh-narrow-to-tick).

/ c

Limit to messages with the same ‘Cc:’ field (mh-narrow-to-cc).

/ m

Limit to messages with the same ‘From:’ field (mh-narrow-to-from).

/ g

Limit to range (mh-narrow-to-range).

/ s

Limit to messages with the same ‘Subject:’ field (mh-narrow-to-subject).

/ t

Limit to messages with the same ‘To:’ field (mh-narrow-to-to).

/ w

Remove last restriction (mh-widen).

All of the limiting commands above refine the display in some way.

The commands / c (mh-narrow-to-cc), / m (mh-narrow-to-from), / s (mh-narrow-to-subject), and / t (mh-narrow-to-to) restrict the display to messages matching the content of the respective field in the current message. However, you can give any of these a prefix argument to edit the pick expression used to narrow the view(50).

You can also limit the display to messages in the ‘tick’ sequence with the command / ' (mh-narrow-to-tick). See section Using Sequences, for information on putting message into the ‘tick’ sequence. Use the / g (mh-narrow-to-range) command to limit the display to messages in a range (see section Ranges).

Each limit can be undone in turn with the / w (mh-widen) command. Give this command a prefix argument to remove all limits.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

18 Using Sequences

For the whole scoop on MH sequences, refer to ‘mh-sequence’(5)(51). As you’ve read, several of the MH-E commands can operate on a sequence, which is a shorthand for a range or group of messages. For example, you might want to forward several messages to a friend or colleague. Here’s how to manipulate sequences. These commands are also available in the ‘Sequence’ menu.

'

Toggle tick mark of range (mh-toggle-tick).

S ?

Display cheat sheet for the commands of the current prefix in minibuffer (mh-prefix-help).

S '

Limit to ticked messages (mh-narrow-to-tick).

S d

Delete range from sequence (mh-delete-msg-from-seq).

S k

Delete sequence (mh-delete-seq).

S l

List all sequences in folder (mh-list-sequences).

S n

Restrict display to messages in sequence (mh-narrow-to-seq).

S p

Add range to sequence (mh-put-msg-in-seq).

S s

Display the sequences in which the current message appears (mh-msg-is-in-seq).

S w

Remove last restriction (mh-widen).

M-x mh-update-sequences

Flush MH-E’s state out to MH.

The ‘mh-sequences’ customization group contains the options associated with sequences.

mh-refile-preserves-sequences-flag

On means that sequences are preserved when messages are refiled (default: ‘on’).

mh-tick-seq

The name of the MH sequence for ticked messages (default: ‘'tick’).

mh-update-sequences-after-mh-show-flag

On means flush MH sequences to disk after message is shown (default: ‘on’).

mh-whitelist-preserves-sequences-flag

On means that sequences are preserved when messages are whitelisted (default: ‘on’).

The following hook is available.

mh-unseen-updated-hook

Hook run after the unseen sequence has been updated (default: nil).

To place a message in a sequence, use S p (mh-put-msg-in-seq). Give S p a range and you can add all the messages in a sequence to another sequence (for example, C-u S p SourceSequence <RET> DestSequence <RET>, see section Ranges).

One specific use of the S p command is ' (mh-toggle-tick) which adds messages to the ‘tick’ sequence. This sequence can be viewed later with the F ' (mh-index-ticked-messages) command (see section Organizing Your Mail with Folders).

You can customize the option mh-tick-seq if you already use the ‘tick’ sequence for your own use. You can also disable all of the ticking functions by choosing the ‘Disable Ticking’ item but there isn’t much advantage to that.

Once you’ve placed some messages in a sequence, you may wish to narrow the field of view to just those messages in the sequence you’ve created. To do this, use S n (mh-narrow-to-seq). You are prompted for the name of the sequence. What this does is show only those messages that are in the selected sequence in the MH-Folder buffer. In addition, it limits further MH-E searches to just those messages. To narrow the view to the messages in the ‘tick’ sequence, use S ' (mh-narrow-to-tick). When you want to widen the view to all your messages again, use S w (mh-widen).

You can see which sequences in which a message appears with the command S s (mh-msg-is-in-seq). Use a prefix argument to display the sequences in which another message appears (as in C-u 42 S s <RET>). Or, you can list all sequences in a selected folder (default is current folder) with S l (mh-list-sequences). The list appears in a buffer named ‘*MH-E Sequences*’ (see section Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers).

If a message is in any sequence (except ‘Previous-Sequence:(52) and ‘cur’) when it is refiled, then it will still be in those sequences in the destination folder. If this behavior is not desired, then turn off the option mh-refile-preserves-sequences-flag.

If you want to remove a message (or range, see section Ranges) from a sequence, use S d (mh-delete-msg-from-seq). If you want to delete an entire sequence, use S k (mh-delete-seq). In the latter case you are prompted for the sequence to delete. Note that this deletes only the sequence, not the messages in the sequence. If you want to delete the messages, use C-u d (see section Reading Your Mail).

Three sequences are maintained internally by MH-E and pushed out to MH when a message is shown. They include the sequence specified by your ‘Unseen-Sequence:’ profile component, ‘cur’, and the sequence listed by the option mh-tick-seq which is ‘tick’ by default. If you do not like this behavior, turn off the option mh-update-sequences-after-mh-show-flag. You can then update the state manually with the x, q, or M-x mh-update-sequences commands.

The hook mh-unseen-updated-hook is run after the unseen sequence has been updated. The variable mh-seen-list can be used by this hook to obtain the list of messages which were removed from the unseen sequence.

With the exceptions of S n and S w, the underlying MH command dealing with sequences is mark(53).


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

19 Dealing With Junk Mail

Marshall Rose once wrote a paper on MH entitled, How to process 200 messages a day and still get some real work done. This chapter could be entitled, How to process 1000 spams a day and still get some real work done.

We use the terms junk mail and spam interchangeably for any unwanted message which includes spam, viruses, and worms. The opposite of spam is ham. The act of classifying a sender as one who sends junk mail is called blacklisting; the opposite is called whitelisting.

J ?

Display cheat sheet for the commands of the current prefix in minibuffer (mh-prefix-help).

J b

Blacklist range as spam (mh-junk-blacklist).

J w

Whitelist range as ham (mh-junk-whitelist).

mh-spamassassin-identify-spammers

Identify spammers who are repeat offenders.

The following table lists the options from the ‘mh-junk’ customization group.

mh-junk-background

If on, spam programs are run in background (default: ‘off’).

mh-junk-disposition

Disposition of junk mail (default: ‘Delete Spam’).

mh-junk-program

Spam program that MH-E should use (default: ‘Auto-detect’).

The following option in the ‘mh-sequences’ customization group is also available.

mh-whitelist-preserves-sequences-flag

On means that sequences are preserved when messages are whitelisted (default: ‘on’).

The following hooks are available.

mh-blacklist-msg-hook

Hook run by J b (mh-junk-blacklist) after marking each message for blacklisting (default: nil).

mh-whitelist-msg-hook

Hook run by J w (mh-junk-whitelist) after marking each message for whitelisting (default ‘nil’).

The following faces are available.

mh-folder-blacklisted

Blacklisted message face.

mh-folder-whitelisted

Whitelisted message face

MH-E depends on SpamAssassin, bogofilter, or SpamProbe to throw the dreck away. This chapter describes briefly how to configure these programs to work well with MH-E and how to use MH-E’s interface that provides continuing education for these programs.

The default setting of the option mh-junk-program is ‘Auto-detect’ which means that MH-E will automatically choose one of SpamAssassin, bogofilter, or SpamProbe in that order. If, for example, you have both SpamAssassin and bogofilter installed and you want to use bogofilter, then you can set this option to ‘Bogofilter’.

The command J b (mh-junk-blacklist) trains the spam program in use with the content of the range (see section Ranges) and then handles the message(s) as specified by the option mh-junk-disposition. By default, this option is set to ‘Delete Spam’ but you can also specify the name of the folder which is useful for building a corpus of spam for training purposes.

In contrast, the command J w (mh-junk-whitelist) reclassifies a range of messages (see section Ranges) as ham if it were incorrectly classified as spam. It then refiles the message into the ‘+inbox’ folder.

If a message is in any sequence (except ‘Previous-Sequence:’ and ‘cur’) when it is whitelisted, then it will still be in those sequences in the destination folder. If this behavior is not desired, then turn off the option mh-whitelist-preserves-sequences-flag.

By default, the programs are run in the foreground, but this can be slow when junking large numbers of messages. If you have enough memory or don’t junk that many messages at the same time, you might try turning on the option mh-junk-background. (54)

The following sections discuss the various counter-spam measures that MH-E can work with.

SpamAssassin

SpamAssassin is one of the more popular spam filtering programs. Get it from your local distribution or from the SpamAssassin web site.

To use SpamAssassin, add the following recipes to ‘~/.procmailrc’:

PATH=$PATH:/usr/bin/mh
MAILDIR=$HOME/`mhparam Path`

# Fight spam with SpamAssassin.
:0fw
| spamc

# Anything with a spam level of 10 or more is junked immediately.
:0:
* ^X-Spam-Level: ..........
/dev/null

:0:
* ^X-Spam-Status: Yes
spam/.

If you don’t use spamc, use ‘spamassassin -P -a’.

Note that one of the recipes above throws away messages with a score greater than or equal to 10. Here’s how you can determine a value that works best for you.

First, run ‘spamassassin -t’ on every mail message in your archive and use gnumeric to verify that the average plus the standard deviation of good mail is under 5, the SpamAssassin default for “spam”.

Using gnumeric, sort the messages by score and view the messages with the highest score. Determine the score which encompasses all of your interesting messages and add a couple of points to be conservative. Add that many dots to the ‘X-Spam-Level:’ header field above to send messages with that score down the drain.

In the example above, messages with a score of 5–9 are set aside in the ‘+spam’ folder for later review. The major weakness of rules-based filters is a plethora of false positives so it is worthwhile to check.

If SpamAssassin classifies a message incorrectly, or is unsure, you can use the MH-E commands J b (mh-junk-blacklist) and J w (mh-junk-whitelist).

The command J b (mh-junk-blacklist) adds a ‘blacklist_from’ entry to ‘~/spamassassin/user_prefs’, deletes the message, and sends the message to the Razor, so that others might not see this spam. If the sa-learn command is available, the message is also recategorized as spam.

The commandJ w (mh-junk-whitelist) adds a ‘whitelist_from’ rule to ‘~/.spamassassin/user_prefs’. If the sa-learn command is available, the message is also recategorized as ham.

Over time, you’ll observe that the same host or domain occurs repeatedly in the ‘blacklist_from’ entries, so you might think that you could avoid future spam by blacklisting all mail from a particular domain. The utility function mh-spamassassin-identify-spammers helps you do precisely that. This function displays a frequency count of the hosts and domains in the ‘blacklist_from’ entries from the last blank line in ‘~/.spamassassin/user_prefs’ to the end of the file. This information can be used so that you can replace multiple ‘blacklist_from’ entries with a single wildcard entry such as:

blacklist_from *@*amazingoffersdirect2u.com

In versions of SpamAssassin (2.50 and on) that support a Bayesian classifier, J b (mh-junk-blacklist) uses the program sa-learn to recategorize the message as spam. Neither MH-E, nor SpamAssassin, rebuilds the database after adding words, so you will need to run ‘sa-learn --rebuild’ periodically. This can be done by adding the following to your ‘crontab’:

0 * * * *       sa-learn --rebuild > /dev/null 2>&1

Bogofilter

Bogofilter is a Bayesian spam filtering program. Get it from your local distribution or from the bogofilter web site.

Bogofilter is taught by running:

bogofilter -n < good-message

on every good message, and

bogofilter -s < spam-message

on every spam message. This is called a full training; three other training methods are described in the FAQ that is distributed with bogofilter. Note that most Bayesian filters need 1000 to 5000 of each type of message to start doing a good job.

To use bogofilter, add the following recipes to ‘~/.procmailrc’:

PATH=$PATH:/usr/bin/mh
MAILDIR=$HOME/`mhparam Path`

# Fight spam with Bogofilter.
:0fw
| bogofilter -3 -e -p

:0:
* ^X-Bogosity: Yes, tests=bogofilter
spam/.

:0:
* ^X-Bogosity: Unsure, tests=bogofilter
spam/unsure/.

If bogofilter classifies a message incorrectly, or is unsure, you can use the MH-E commands J b (mh-junk-blacklist) and J w (mh-junk-whitelist) to update bogofilter’s training.

The Bogofilter FAQ suggests that you run the following occasionally to shrink the database:

bogoutil -d wordlist.db | bogoutil -l wordlist.db.new
mv wordlist.db wordlist.db.prv
mv wordlist.db.new wordlist.db

The Bogofilter tuning HOWTO describes how you can fine-tune bogofilter.

SpamProbe

SpamProbe is a Bayesian spam filtering program. Get it from your local distribution or from the SpamProbe web site.

To use SpamProbe, add the following recipes to ‘~/.procmailrc’:

PATH=$PATH:/usr/bin/mh
MAILDIR=$HOME/`mhparam Path`

# Fight spam with SpamProbe.
:0
SCORE=| spamprobe receive

:0 wf
| formail -I "X-SpamProbe: $SCORE"

:0:
*^X-SpamProbe: SPAM
spam/.

If SpamProbe classifies a message incorrectly, you can use the MH-E commands J b (mh-junk-blacklist) and J w (mh-junk-whitelist) to update SpamProbe’s training.

Other Things You Can Do

There are a couple of things that you can add to ‘~/.procmailrc’ in order to filter out a lot of spam and viruses. The first is to eliminate any message with a Windows executable (which is most likely a virus). The second is to eliminate mail in character sets that you can’t read.

PATH=$PATH:/usr/bin/mh
MAILDIR=$HOME/`mhparam Path`

#
# Filter messages with w32 executables/virii.
#
# These attachments are base64 and have a TVqQAAMAAAAEAAAA//8AALg
# pattern. The string "this program cannot be run in MS-DOS mode"
# encoded in base64 is 4fug4AtAnNIbg and helps to avoid false
# positives (Roland Smith via Pete from the bogofilter mailing list).
#
:0 B:
* ^Content-Transfer-Encoding:.*base64
* ^TVqQAAMAAAAEAAAA//8AALg
* 4fug4AtAnNIbg
spam/exe/.

#
# Filter mail in unreadable character sets (from the Bogofilter FAQ).
#
UNREADABLE='[^?"]*big5|iso-2022-jp|ISO-2022-KR|euc-kr|gb2312|ks_c_5601-1987'

:0:
* 1^0 $ ^Subject:.*=\?($UNREADABLE)
* 1^0 $ ^Content-Type:.*charset="?($UNREADABLE)
spam/unreadable/.

:0:
* ^Content-Type:.*multipart
* B ?? $ ^Content-Type:.*^?.*charset="?($UNREADABLE)
spam/unreadable/.

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

20 Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers

This chapter covers the following command and the various MH-E buffers,

mh-version

Display version information about MH-E and the MH mail handling system.

One command worth noting is M-x mh-version. You can compare the version this command prints to the latest release (see section Getting MH-E). The output of M-x mh-version, found in a buffer named ‘*MH-E Info*’, should usually be included with any bug report you submit (see section Bug Reports).

MH-E Buffers

Besides the MH-Folder, MH-Show, and MH-Letter buffers, MH-E creates several other buffers. They are:

*MH-E Folders*

This buffer contains the output of F l (mh-list-folders). See section Organizing Your Mail with Folders.

*MH-E Help*

This buffer contains the output of ? (mh-help) and C-c ? in MH-Letter mode. See section Using This Manual.

*MH-E Info*

This buffer contains the output of M-x mh-version <RET>.

*MH-E Log*

This buffer contains the last 100 lines of the output of the various MH commands.

*MH-E Mail Delivery*

This buffer contains the transcript of a mail delivery. See section Sending a Message.

*MH-E Recipients*

This buffer contains the output of C-c C-w (mh-check-whom) and is killed when draft is sent. See section Checking Recipients.

*MH-E Sequences*

This buffer contains the output of S l (mh-list-sequences). See section Using Sequences.

*mh-temp*

This is a scratch, ephemeral, buffer used by MH-E functions. Note that it is hidden because the first character in the name is a space. You’ll generally not have any need for this buffer.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

Appendix A Scan Line Formats

This appendix discusses how MH-E creates, parses, and manipulates scan lines. If you have your own MH scan or inc format files, you can teach MH-E how to handle them, but it isn’t easy as you’ll see.

This table lists the options in the ‘mh-scan-line-formats’ customization group.

mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag

On means that the message number width is determined dynamically (default: ‘on’).

mh-scan-format-file

Specifies the format file to pass to the scan program (default: ‘Use MH-E scan Format’).

mh-scan-prog

Program used to scan messages (default: "scan").

There are a couple of caveats when creating your own scan format file. First, MH-E will not work if your scan lines do not include message numbers. It will work poorly if you don’t dedicate a column for showing the current message and notations. It is also best to keep the first column empty to make room for the cursor and so that text isn’t obscured by the current message’s overlay arrow when running in a terminal. You won’t be able to use the option mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag or the threading features (see section Viewing Message Threads).

If you’ve created your own format to handle long message numbers, you’ll be pleased to know you no longer need it since MH-E adapts its internal format based upon the largest message number if mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag is on (the default). If you prefer fixed-width message numbers, turn off mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag and call mh-set-cmd-note with the width specified by your format file (see mh-scan-format-file). For example, the default width is 4, so you would use ‘(mh-set-cmd-note 4)’.

The default setting for mh-scan-format-file is ‘Use MH-E scan Format’. This means that the format string will be taken from the either mh-scan-format-mh or mh-scan-format-nmh depending on whether MH or nmh (or GNU mailutils MH) is in use. This setting also enables you to turn on the option mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag. You can also set this option to ‘Use Default scan Format’ to get the same output as you would get if you ran scan from the shell. If you have a format file that you want MH-E to use but not MH, you can set this option to ‘Specify a scan Format File’ and enter the name of your format file.

The scan format that MH-E uses when mh-scan-format-file is set to its default of ‘Use MH-E scan Format’ is held in the variables mh-scan-format-nmh and mh-scan-format-mh depending on whether you are using nmh (or GNU mailutils MH) or not. Typically, you create your own format files rather than modifying these variables. The value of mh-scan-format-nmh is:

(concat
 "%4(msg)"
 "%<(cur)+%| %>"
 "%<{replied}-"
 "%?(nonnull(comp{to}))%<(mymbox{to})t%>"
 "%?(nonnull(comp{cc}))%<(mymbox{cc})c%>"
 "%?(nonnull(comp{bcc}))%<(mymbox{bcc})b%>"
 "%?(nonnull(comp{newsgroups}))n%>"
 "%<(zero) %>"
 "%02(mon{date})/%02(mday{date})%<{date} %|*%>"
 "%<(mymbox{from})%<{to}To:%14(decode(friendly{to}))%>%>"
 "%<(zero)%17(decode(friendly{from}))%>  "
 "%(decode{subject})%<{body}<<%{body}%>")

The setting for mh-scan-format-mh is similar, except that MH doesn’t have the function decode (which is used to decode RFC 2047 encodings).

These strings are passed to the scan program via the ‘-format’ argument. The formats are identical to the defaults except that additional hints for fontification have been added to the existing notations in the fifth column (remember that in Emacs, the columns start at 0). The values of the fifth column, in priority order, are: ‘-’ if the message has been replied to, ‘t’ if an address in the ‘To:’ field matches one of the mailboxes of the current user, ‘c’ if the ‘Cc:’ field matches, ‘b’ if the ‘Bcc:’ field matches, and ‘n’ if a non-empty ‘Newsgroups:’ field is present.

The name of the program that generates a listing of one line per message is held in mh-scan-prog (default: "scan"). Unless this variable contains an absolute pathname, it is assumed to be in the mh-progs directory (see section Getting Started). You may link another program to scan (see ‘mh-profile’(5)) to produce a different type of listing(55).

If you change the format of the scan lines you’ll need to tell MH-E how to parse the new format. As you will see, quite a lot of variables are involved to do that. Use M-x apropos <RET> mh-scan.*regexp <RET> to obtain a list of these variables. You will also have to call mh-set-cmd-note if your notations are not in column 4 (columns in Emacs start with 0). Note that unlike most of the user options described in this manual, these are variables and must be set with setq instead of in a customization buffer. For help with regular expressions, see section Syntax of Regular Expressions in The GNU Emacs Manual.

The first variable has to do with pruning out garbage.

mh-scan-valid-regexp

This regular expression describes a valid scan line. This is used to eliminate error messages that are occasionally produced by inc(56) or scan (default: "^ *[0-9]").

Next, many variables control how the scan lines are parsed.

mh-scan-body-regexp

This regular expression matches the message body fragment. Note that the default setting of mh-folder-font-lock-keywords expects this expression to contain at least one parenthesized expression which matches the body text as in the default of "\\(<<\\([^\n]+\\)?\\)". If this regular expression is not correct, the body fragment will not be highlighted with the face mh-folder-body.

mh-scan-cur-msg-number-regexp

This regular expression matches the current message. It must match from the beginning of the line. Note that the default setting of mh-folder-font-lock-keywords expects this expression to contain at least one parenthesized expression which matches the message number as in the default of "^\\( *[0-9]+\\+\\).*". This expression includes the leading space and current message marker ‘+’ within the parenthesis since it looks better to highlight these items as well. The highlighting is done with the face mh-folder-cur-msg-number. This regular expression should be correct as it is needed by non-fontification functions. See also mh-note-cur.

mh-scan-date-regexp

This regular expression matches a valid date. It must not be anchored to the beginning or the end of the line. Note that the default setting of mh-folder-font-lock-keywords expects this expression to contain only one parenthesized expression which matches the date field as in the default of "\\([0-9][0-9]/[0-9][0-9]\\)". If this regular expression is not correct, the date will not be highlighted with the face mh-folder-date.

mh-scan-deleted-msg-regexp

This regular expression matches deleted messages. It must match from the beginning of the line. Note that the default setting of mh-folder-font-lock-keywords expects this expression to contain at least one parenthesized expression which matches the message number as in the default of "^\\( *[0-9]+\\)D". This expression includes the leading space within the parenthesis since it looks better to highlight it as well. The highlighting is done with the face mh-folder-deleted. This regular expression should be correct as it is needed by non-fontification functions. See also mh-note-deleted.

mh-scan-good-msg-regexp

This regular expression matches “good” messages. It must match from the beginning of the line. Note that the default setting of mh-folder-font-lock-keywords expects this expression to contain at least one parenthesized expression which matches the message number as in the default of "^\\( *[0-9]+\\)[^D^0-9]". This expression includes the leading space within the parenthesis since it looks better to highlight it as well. The highlighting is done with the face mh-folder-msg-number. This regular expression should be correct as it is needed by non-fontification functions.

mh-scan-msg-format-regexp

This regular expression finds the message number width in a scan format. Note that the message number must be placed in a parenthesized expression as in the default of "%\\([0-9]*\\)(msg)". This variable is only consulted if mh-scan-format-file is set to ‘Use MH-E scan Format’.

mh-scan-msg-format-string

This is a format string for the width of the message number in a scan format. Use ‘0%d’ for zero-filled message numbers. This variable is only consulted if mh-scan-format-file is set to ‘Use MH-E scan Format’ (default: "%d").

mh-scan-msg-number-regexp

This regular expression extracts the message number. It must match from the beginning of the line. Note that the message number must be placed in a parenthesized expression as in the default of "^ *\\([0-9]+\\)".

mh-scan-msg-overflow-regexp

This regular expression matches overflowed message numbers (default: "^[?0-9][0-9]").

mh-scan-msg-search-regexp

This regular expression matches a particular message. It is a format string; use ‘%d’ to represent the location of the message number within the expression as in the default of "^[^0-9]*%d[^0-9]".

mh-scan-rcpt-regexp

This regular expression specifies the recipient in messages you sent. Note that the default setting of mh-folder-font-lock-keywords expects this expression to contain two parenthesized expressions. The first is expected to match the ‘To:’ that the default scan format file generates. The second is expected to match the recipient’s name as in the default of "\\(To:\\)\\(..............\\)". If this regular expression is not correct, the ‘To:’ string will not be highlighted with the face mh-folder-to and the recipient will not be highlighted with the face mh-folder-address.

mh-scan-refiled-msg-regexp

This regular expression matches refiled messages. It must match from the beginning of the line. Note that the default setting of mh-folder-font-lock-keywords expects this expression to contain at least one parenthesized expression which matches the message number as in the default of "^\\( *[0-9]+\\)\\^". This expression includes the leading space within the parenthesis since it looks better to highlight it as well. The highlighting is done with the face mh-folder-refiled. This regular expression should be correct as it is needed by non-fontification functions. See also mh-note-refiled.

mh-scan-sent-to-me-sender-regexp

This regular expression matches messages sent to us. Note that the default setting of mh-folder-font-lock-keywords expects this expression to contain at least two parenthesized expressions. The first should match the fontification hint (see mh-scan-format-nmh) and the second should match the user name as in the default of "^ *[0-9]+.\\([bct]\\).....[ ]*\\(..................\\)". If this regular expression is not correct, the notation hints will not be highlighted with the face mh-mh-folder-sent-to-me-hint and the sender will not be highlighted with the face mh-folder-sent-to-me-sender.

mh-scan-subject-regexp

This regular expression matches the subject. It must match from the beginning of the line. Note that the default setting of ‘mh-folder-font-lock-keywords’ expects this expression to contain at least three parenthesized expressions. The first is expected to match the ‘Re:’ string, if any, and is highlighted with the face mh-folder-followup. The second matches an optional bracketed number after ‘Re:’, such as in ‘Re[2]:’ (and is thus a sub-expression of the first expression). The third is expected to match the subject line itself which is highlighted with the face mh-folder-subject. For example, the default is "^ *[0-9]+........[ ]*...................
\\([Rr][Ee]\\(\\[[0-9]+\\]\\)?:\\s-*\\)*\\([^<\n]*\\)". This regular expression should be correct as it is needed by non-fontification functions. Note that this example is broken up on two lines for readability, but is actually a single string.

Finally, there are a slew of variables that control how MH-E annotates the scan lines.

mh-cmd-note

Column for notations (default: 4). This variable should be set with the function mh-set-cmd-note. This variable may be updated dynamically if mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag is on. The following variables contain the notational characters. Note that columns in Emacs start with 0.

mh-note-copied

Messages that have been copied are marked by this character (default: ?C).

mh-note-cur

The current message (in MH, not in MH-E) is marked by this character (default: ?+). See also mh-scan-cur-msg-number-regexp.

mh-note-deleted

Messages that have been deleted are marked by this character (default: ?D). See also mh-scan-deleted-msg-regexp.

mh-note-dist

Messages that have been redistributed are marked by this character (default: ?R).

mh-note-forw

Messages that have been forwarded are marked by this character (default: ?F).

mh-note-printed

Messages that have been printed are marked by this character (default: ?P).

mh-note-refiled

Messages that have been refiled are marked by this character (default: ?^). See also mh-scan-refiled-msg-regexp.

mh-note-repl

Messages that have been replied to are marked by this character (default: ?-).

mh-note-seq

Messages in a user-defined sequence are marked by this character (default: ?%). Messages in the ‘search’ sequence are marked by this character as well.

For example, let’s say I have the following in ‘scan.format’ which displays the sender, the subject, and the message number. This format places a ‘+’ after the message number for the current message according to MH; it also uses that column for notations.

%20(decode(friendly{from})) %50(decode{subject})  %4(msg)%<(cur)+%| %>

The first thing you have to do is tell MH-E to use this file. Customize mh-scan-format-file and set its value to ‘Use Default scan Format’. If you didn’t get already turn off mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag, you’ll need to do that first.

Next, tell MH-E what a valid scan line looks like so that you can at least display the output of scan in your MH-Folder buffer.

(setq mh-scan-valid-regexp "[0-9]+[+D^ ]$")

Now, in order to get rid of the ‘Cursor not pointing to message’ message, you need to tell MH-E how to access the message number. You should also see why MH-E requires that you include a message number in the first place.

(setq mh-scan-msg-number-regexp "^.* \\([0-9]+\\)[+D^ ]$")
(setq mh-scan-msg-search-regexp " %d[+D^ ]$")

In order to get the next and previous commands working, add this.

(setq mh-scan-good-msg-regexp "^.* \\([0-9]+\\)[+D^ ]$")

Note that the current message isn’t marked with a ‘+’ when moving between the next and previous messages. Here is the code required to get this working.

(set-mh-cmd-note 76)
(setq mh-scan-cur-msg-number-regexp "^.* \\([0-9]+\\)\\+$")

Finally, add the following to delete and refile messages.

(setq mh-scan-deleted-msg-regexp "^.* \\([0-9]+\\)D$")
(setq mh-scan-refiled-msg-regexp "^.* \\([0-9]+\\)\\^$")

This is just a bare minimum; it’s best to adjust all of the regular expressions to ensure that MH-E and highlighting perform well.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively

This appendix explains how to use procmail to file mail from mailing lists into folders which can then be read easily with MH-E(57). Some mailing lists have such high traffic that Gnus must be used and I discuss how to use Gnus side-by-side with MH-E.

First, I’ll describe how to put mail from your mailing lists directly into an MH folder using procmail. First, add the following to ‘~/.procmailrc’. While the logging variables aren’t strictly necessary, they are extremely useful.

[1]  # Update PATH so procmail can find myrcvstore, rcvstore and mhparam.
[2]  PATH=$PATH:/usr/lib/mh:/usr/bin/mh:$HOME/bin
[3]
[4]  # Point LOGFILE at the actual log file.
[5]  LOGFILE=$HOME/.procmail.log
[6]
[7]  # This setting provides just the right amount of information.
[8]  LOGABSTRACT=all
[9]
[10] # Uncomment the following line to see how your patterns match.
[11] #VERBOSE=yes
[12]
[13] # Place mail sent to any MH-E mailing list in +mh-e.
[14] :0 w: mh-e$LOCKEXT
[15] * ^TO.*mh-e-.*@.*sourceforge.net
[16] | myrcvstore -create +mh-e

Line 14 creates a lock file in your mail directory based upon the name of the folder. This is done because rcvstore does not perform locking. While this lock file will prevent procmail from writing to a folder concurrently, there is a slight chance that you might lose a message if you’re performing operations on a folder at the same time rcvstore is placing a message there. You have been warned. Now that that disclaimer is out of the way, note that I’ve been using this set-up for over a decade and haven’t lost anything to my knowledge(58).

Line 16 uses the following script, myrcvstore, to massage the message as described in the comment and file the message in the given folder(59).

#! /bin/sh

# Accepts a message on standard input and passes it through rcvstore
# after first passing it through any filters. All arguments are passed
# on to rcvstore.

# Force the "From user date" to become part of header. One reason this
# is done is because the presence of the From field confuses dist so
# that dist adds a new header, rather than using the existing header.
# Note that this should not be done for any message that goes into a
# Gnus incoming file (Gnus will thrown an error) nor should it be
# applied to any message that goes to the system mailbox because the
# entire mailbox will be incorporated as a single message.
formail -c -z -R 'From ' X-Envelope-From: |
rcvstore $@

If your version of rcvstore doesn’t add messages to the ‘unseen’ sequence by default, add the following line to your MH profile:

Unseen-Sequence: unseen

Now view your new messages with the speedbar (see section The Speedbar) or with F n (mh-index-new-messages). See section Organizing Your Mail with Folders.

If you’re on a mailing list that is so voluminous that it is impossible to read every message, it usually better to read the mailing list like a newsgroup in a news reader. Emacs has a built-in newsreader called Gnus. The remainder of this appendix talks about how to use Gnus with an MH message store. The version of Gnus that was used to prepare this manual was 5.10. Versions 5.8 through 5.10 should work but versions prior to 5.8 use different options.

This table contains a list of Gnus options that you will have to modify. Note that for them to become accessible, you’ll have to load ‘nnml.el’ first. This can be done with M-x load-library <RET> nnml <RET>.

gnus-secondary-select-methods

Select the ‘nnml’ value. This select method uses directories for folders and individual files for messages, just like MH. You do not have to set an address.

mail-sources

Select the ‘Several files in a directory’ value, check the ‘Path’ box and enter ‘~/Mail’ to tell Gnus where to find your mail.

message-mail-user-agent

In order to send mail within Gnus using MH-E, set this option to ‘mail-user-agent’ and set the mail-user-agent option to ‘Emacs interface to MH’.

nnmail-keep-last-article

Since Gnus keeps track of which messages you have read, it would be bad if Gnus expired the last message, for example, message 100, and rcvstore gave the next new message number 1. Gnus would then ignore it since it thinks that you’ve read messages 1–100. Turning on this option ensures that the last message is never removed thereby eliminating this problem.

Next add the following to ‘~/.procmailrc’. If you don’t subscribe to the GnuCash mailing list, substitute one to which you are subscribed.

PATH=$PATH:/usr/bin/mh
MAILDIR=$HOME/`mhparam Path`
# Place mail sent to the GnuCash mailing list in gnucash.spool, where
# Gnus will pick it up.
:0:
* ^TO.*gnucash.*@.*gnucash.org
gnucash.spool

Wait for some messages to appear in ‘gnucash.spool’ and run Gnus with M-x gnus <RET>. To view the folder created in the example above, you would tell Gnus about it the first time only with G m gnucash <RET> nnml <RET>. In MH-E, this folder is known as ‘+gnucash’.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

Appendix C Odds and Ends

This appendix covers a few topics that don’t fit elsewhere. Here I tell you how to report bugs and how to get on the MH-E mailing lists. I also point out some additional sources of information.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

C.1 Bug Reports

Bug reports should be filed at SourceForge. You need to be a SourceForge user to submit bug reports, but this is easy enough to do that it shouldn’t be a restriction for you. Please include the output of M-x mh-version (see section Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers) in any bug report you send unless you’re 110% positive we won’t ask for it.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

C.2 MH-E Mailing Lists

There are several mailing lists for MH-E. They are mh-e-users at lists.sourceforge.net, mh-e-announce at lists.sourceforge.net, and mh-e-devel at lists.sourceforge.net. You can subscribe or view the archives at SourceForge. Do not report bugs on these lists; please submit them via SourceForge (see section Bug Reports).


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

C.3 MH FAQ and Support

The article MH Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) with Answers appears monthly in the newsgroup ‘comp.mail.mh’. While very little is there that deals with MH-E specifically, there is an incredible wealth of material about MH itself which you will find useful.

You can find FAQs on MH-E by searching for labels:support on the Tickets page on SourceForge. If you don’t find the answer to your question, file a ticket and your question will become a new FAQ!


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

C.4 Getting MH-E

Because MH-E is undergoing a phase of sustained growth, the version of MH-E in your Emacs is likely to be out of date although it is most likely to be more up to date than the copy that comes with the MH distribution in ‘miscellany/mh-e’.

New MH-E releases are always available for downloading at SourceForge before they appear in an Emacs release. You can read the release notes on that page to determine if the given release of MH-E is already installed in your version of Emacs. You can also read the change log to see if you are interested in what the given release of MH-E has to offer (although we have no doubt that you will be extremely interested in all new releases).

If you use Debian, you can install the Debian mh-e package instead.

After you download and extract the MH-E tarball, read the ‘README’ file and ‘MH-E-NEWS’. These correspond to the release notes and change log mentioned above. The file ‘README’ contains instructions on installing MH-E. If you’re already running Emacs, please quit that session and start again to load in the new MH-E. Check that you’re running the new version with the command M-x mh-version.

In addition to the mh-e package, the SourceForge site also contains doc and contrib packages. The former is the latest release of this manual, and the latter contains a few contributed packages you might find useful.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

Appendix D History of MH-E

MH-E was originally written by Brian Reid in 1983 and has changed hands several times since then. Jim Larus wanted to do something similar for GNU Emacs, and ended up completely rewriting it that same year. In 1989, Stephen Gildea picked it up and added many improvements. Bill Wohler then took over in 2000 and moved its development to SourceForge where it lives today.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

D.1 From Brian Reid

One day in 1983 I got the flu and had to stay home from work for three days with nothing to do. I used that time to write MHE. The fundamental idea behind MHE was that it was a “puppeteer” driving the MH programs underneath it. MH had a model that the editor was supposed to run as a sub-process of the mailer, which seemed to me at the time to be the tail wagging the dog. So I turned it around and made the editor drive the MH programs. I made sure that the UCI people (who were maintaining MH at the time) took in my changes and made them stick.

Today, I still use my own version of MHE because I don’t at all like the way that GNU MH-E works and I’ve never gotten to be good enough at hacking Emacs Lisp to make GNU MH-E do what I want. The Gosling-emacs version of MHE and the GNU Emacs version of MH-E have almost nothing in common except similar names. They work differently, have different conceptual models, and have different key bindings(60).

Brian Reid, June 1994


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

D.2 From Jim Larus

Brian Reid, while at CMU or shortly after going to Stanford wrote a mail reading program called MHE for Gosling Emacs. It had much the same structure as MH-E (i.e., invoked MH programs), though it was simpler and the commands were slightly different. Unfortunately, I no longer have a copy so the differences are lost in the mists of time.

In ’82–83, I was working at BBN and wrote a lot of mlisp code in Gosling Emacs to make it look more like Tennex Emacs. One of the packages that I picked up and improved was Reid’s mail system. In ’83, I went back to Berkeley. About that time, Stallman’s first version of GNU Emacs came out and people started to move to it from Gosling Emacs (as I recall, the transition took a year or two). I decided to port Reid’s MHE and used the mlisp to Emacs Lisp translator that came with GNU Emacs. It did a lousy job and the resulting code didn’t work, so I bit the bullet and rewrote the code by hand (it was a lot smaller and simpler then, so it took only a day or two).

Soon after that, MH-E became part of the standard Emacs distribution and suggestions kept dribbling in for improvements. MH-E soon reached sufficient functionality to keep me happy, but I kept on improving it because I was a graduate student with plenty of time on my hands and it was more fun than my dissertation. In retrospect, the one thing that I regret is not writing any documentation, which seriously limited the use and appeal of the package.

In ’89, I came to Wisconsin as a professor and decided not to work on MH-E. It was stable, except for minor bugs, and had enough functionality, so I let it be for a few years. Stephen Gildea of BBN began to pester me about the bugs, but I ignored them. In 1990, he went off to the X Consortium, said good bye, and said that he would now be using xmh. A few months later, he came back and said that he couldn’t stand xmh and could I put a few more bug fixes into MH-E. At that point, I had no interest in fixing MH-E, so I gave the responsibility of maintenance to him and he has done a fine job since then.

Jim Larus, June 1994


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

D.3 From Stephen Gildea

In 1987 I went to work for Bolt Beranek and Newman, as Jim had before me. In my previous job, I had been using RMAIL, but as my folders tend to run large, I was frustrated with the speed of RMAIL. However, I stuck with it because I wanted the GNU Emacs interface. I am very familiar and comfortable with the Emacs interface (with just a few modifications of my own) and dislike having to use applications with embedded editors; they never live up to Emacs.

MH is the mail reader of choice at BBN, so I converted to it. Since I didn’t want to give up using an Emacs interface, I started using MH-E. As is my wont, I started hacking on it almost immediately. I first used version 3.4m. One of the first features I added was to treat the folder buffer as a file-visiting buffer: you could lock it, save it, and be warned of unsaved changes when killing it. I also worked to bring its functionality a little closer to RMAIL. Jim Larus was very cooperative about merging in my changes, and my efforts first appeared in version 3.6, distributed with Emacs 18.52 in 1988. Next I decided MH-E was too slow and optimized it a lot. Version, 3.7, distributed with Emacs 18.56 in 1990, was noticeably faster.

When I moved to the X Consortium I became the first person there to not use xmh. (There is now one other engineer there using MH-E.) About this point I took over maintenance of MH-E from Jim and was finally able to add some features Jim hadn’t accepted, such as the backward searching undo. My first release was 3.8 (Emacs 18.58) in 1992.

Now, in 1994, we see a flurry of releases, with both 4.0 and 5.0. Version 4.0 added many new features, including background folder collection and support for composing MIME messages. (Reading MIME messages remains to be done, alas.) While writing this book, Bill Wohler gave MH-E its closest examination ever, uncovering bugs and inconsistencies that required a new major version to fix, and so version 5 was released.

Stephen Gildea, June 1994


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

D.4 From Bill Wohler

The preface originally included the following text which I use to begin my story:

But it’s important to note a brief history of MH-E.

Version 3 was prevalent through the Emacs 18 and early Emacs 19 years. Then Version 4 came out (Emacs 19.23), which introduced several new and changed commands. Next, Version 5.0 was released, which fixed some bugs and incompatibilities, and was incorporated into Emacs 19.29.

After a long break, Stephen handed the reins over to me in 2000. I moved the project to a new site called SourceForge and organized a great team of developers. Our first release in late 2001 was version 6. It appeared around the time of Emacs 21.2 and had menus and tool bar buttons.

Then, indexed searches, improved MIME handling, a speedbar, multiple identities, alias completion, an index view of unseen messages, spam software support, Face and X-Image-URL header field support, Fcc completion, arbitrary range handling, and draft form editing were introduced in the version 7 series around the time of Emacs 21.4 (2004). Still, Emacs itself contained version 5 of MH-E released back in 1994.

Version 8 development was mostly driven by the rewrite of the manual. It also brought GNU mailutils MH support, S/MIME support, picon support, and an improved interface for hiding header fields. The CVS repository was migrated from SourceForge to Savannah (only for those files that were already part of Emacs) and the software was completely reorganized to push back two decades of entropy. Version 8 appeared in Emacs 22.1 in 2006.

Development was then quiet for a couple of years. Emacs 23.1, which is due out in 2009, will contain version 8.1. This version includes a few new features and several bug fixes.

Bill Wohler, August 2008


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

Appendix E GNU Free Documentation License

Version 1.3, 3 November 2008

Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
http://fsf.org/

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
  1. PREAMBLE

    The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.

    This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.

    We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.

  2. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS

    This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.

    A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.

    A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.

    The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.

    The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.

    A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.

    Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.

    The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.

    The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public.

    A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.

    The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.

  3. VERBATIM COPYING

    You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.

    You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.

  4. COPYING IN QUANTITY

    If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.

    If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.

    If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.

    It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.

  5. MODIFICATIONS

    You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:

    1. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
    2. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you from this requirement.
    3. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher.
    4. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
    5. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices.
    6. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
    7. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s license notice.
    8. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
    9. Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section Entitled “History” in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence.
    10. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the “History” section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
    11. For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”, Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
    12. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
    13. Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version.
    14. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
    15. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.

    If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.

    You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.

    You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.

    The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.

  6. COMBINING DOCUMENTS

    You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.

    The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.

    In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”

  7. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS

    You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.

    You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.

  8. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS

    A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.

    If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.

  9. TRANSLATION

    Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.

    If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.

  10. TERMINATION

    You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.

    However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.

    Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.

    Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it.

  11. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE

    The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.

    Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.

  12. RELICENSING

    “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.

    “CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization.

    “Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in part, as part of another Document.

    An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this License, and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.

    The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.

ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents

To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:

  Copyright (C)  year  your name.
  Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
  under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
  or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
  with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
  Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
  Free Documentation License''.

If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with…Texts.” line with this:

    with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with
    the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts
    being list.

If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.

If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

Appendix F GNU General Public License

Version 3, 29 June 2007

Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://fsf.org/

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.

The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program—to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.

For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions.

Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.

Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

  1. Definitions.

    “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.

    “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.

    “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations.

    To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work.

    A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.

    To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.

    To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.

    An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.

  2. Source Code.

    The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work.

    A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.

    The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.

    The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work.

    The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source.

    The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.

  3. Basic Permissions.

    All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.

    You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.

    Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary.

  4. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.

    No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures.

    When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.

  5. Conveying Verbatim Copies.

    You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.

    You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.

  6. Conveying Modified Source Versions.

    You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

    1. The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.
    2. The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”.
    3. You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
    4. If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.

    A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.

  7. Conveying Non-Source Forms.

    You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:

    1. Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.
    2. Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
    3. Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b.
    4. Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
    5. Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d.

    A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work.

    A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.

    “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.

    If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).

    The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.

    Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.

  8. Additional Terms.

    “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions.

    When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.

    Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:

    1. Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
    2. Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or
    3. Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
    4. Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
    5. Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
    6. Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors.

    All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.

    If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.

    Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.

  9. Termination.

    You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11).

    However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.

    Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.

    Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10.

  10. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.

    You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.

  11. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.

    Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.

    An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.

    You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.

  12. Patents.

    A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”.

    A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License.

    Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.

    In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party.

    If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid.

    If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.

    A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.

    Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.

  13. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom.

    If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.

  14. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.

    Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such.

  15. Revised Versions of this License.

    The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

    Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

    If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.

    Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.

  16. Disclaimer of Warranty.

    THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

  17. Limitation of Liability.

    IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

  18. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.

    If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) year name of author

This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at
your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program.  If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:

program Copyright (C) year name of author
This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.

The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.

The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html.


[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

Key (Character) Index

Jump to:   !   '   ,   .   /   :   ;   >   ?   |  
B   C   D   E   F   G   I   J   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   X  
Index Entry  Section

!
! 6.7 Files and Pipes
! 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
! 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders

' 18 Using Sequences
' 18 Using Sequences

,
, (comma) 6 Reading Your Mail
, (comma) 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
, (comma) 9 Editing a Draft
, (comma) 9.1 Editing the Message

.
. (period) 6.1 Viewing Your Mail

/
/ ' 17 Limiting Display
/ ' 17 Limiting Display
/ ? 17 Limiting Display
/ c 17 Limiting Display
/ c 17 Limiting Display
/ g 17 Limiting Display
/ g 17 Limiting Display
/ m 17 Limiting Display
/ m 17 Limiting Display
/ s 17 Limiting Display
/ s 17 Limiting Display
/ t 17 Limiting Display
/ t 17 Limiting Display
/ w 17 Limiting Display
/ w 17 Limiting Display

:
: (colon) 6 Reading Your Mail
: (colon) 6.2 Viewing Attachments

;
; (semicolon) 6 Reading Your Mail
; (semicolon) 6.2 Viewing Attachments

>
> 6 Reading Your Mail
> 6.7 Files and Pipes

?
? 3.3 Processing Mail
? 4 Using This Manual
? 6 Reading Your Mail
? 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
? MH-E Buffers

|
| 6 Reading Your Mail
| 6.7 Files and Pipes

B
<BS> 3.3 Processing Mail
<BS> 6 Reading Your Mail
<BS> 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
<BS> 6.4 Digests

C
c 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
c 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
C-@ 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
C-b 3.3 Processing Mail
C-c ? 3.1 Sending Mail
C-c ? 4 Using This Manual
C-c ? 9 Editing a Draft
C-c ? 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c ? 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c ? MH-E Buffers
C-c C-c 3.1 Sending Mail
C-c C-c 3.3 Processing Mail
C-c C-c 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages
C-c C-c 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-c 9.9 Sending a Message
C-c C-c 9.9 Sending a Message
C-c C-c 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-c 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-d 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-d 11 Identities
C-c C-d 11 Identities
C-c C-e 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-e Previewing Multimedia Messages
C-c C-e Previewing Multimedia Messages
C-c C-e Previewing Multimedia Messages
C-c C-f a 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f a 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f b 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f b 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f c 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f c 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f C-a 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f C-a 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f C-b 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f C-b 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f C-c 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f C-c 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f C-d 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f C-d 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f C-f 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f C-f 9.1 Editing the Message
C-c C-f C-f 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f C-l 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f C-l 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f C-m 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f C-m 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f C-r 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f C-r 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f C-s 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f C-s 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f C-t 3.3 Processing Mail
C-c C-f C-t 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f C-t 9.1 Editing the Message
C-c C-f C-t 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f C-t 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f d 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f d 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f f 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f f 9.1 Editing the Message
C-c C-f f 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f l 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f l 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f m 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f m 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f r 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f r 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f s 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f s 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-f t 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-f t 9.1 Editing the Message
C-c C-f t 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-i 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-i 9.3 Inserting Messages
C-c C-m 9.6 Adding Attachments
C-c C-m C-e 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m C-e 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
C-c C-m C-f 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m C-f Forwarding Multimedia Messages
C-c C-m C-g 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m C-g Including an FTP Reference
C-c C-m C-g Including tar Files
C-c C-m C-i 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m C-i Including Files
C-c C-m C-m 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m C-m Previewing Multimedia Messages
C-c C-m C-m Previewing Multimedia Messages
C-c C-m C-m Previewing Multimedia Messages
C-c C-m C-n 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m C-n 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
C-c C-m C-s 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m C-s 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
C-c C-m C-t 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m C-t Including tar Files
C-c C-m C-u 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m C-u Previewing Multimedia Messages
C-c C-m C-x 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m C-x Including Other External Files
C-c C-m e e 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m e e 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
C-c C-m e s 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m e s 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
C-c C-m f 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m f Forwarding Multimedia Messages
C-c C-m g 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m g Including an FTP Reference
C-c C-m i 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m i Including Files
C-c C-m m 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m m Previewing Multimedia Messages
C-c C-m n 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m n 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
C-c C-m s e 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m s e 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
C-c C-m s s 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m s s 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
C-c C-m t 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m t Including tar Files
C-c C-m u 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m u Previewing Multimedia Messages
C-c C-m x 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-m x Including Other External Files
C-c C-o 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-o 9.1 Editing the Message
C-c C-p 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-p 15 Searching Through Messages
C-c C-q 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-q 9.10 Killing the Draft
C-c C-s 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-s 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
C-c C-t 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-t 9.1 Editing the Message
C-c C-w 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-w 9.8 Checking Recipients
C-c C-w MH-E Buffers
C-c C-y 9 Editing a Draft
C-c C-y 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
C-c C-y 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
C-c M-d 9 Editing a Draft
C-c M-d 11 Identities
C-c M-d 11 Identities
C-c <RET> 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
C-d 6 Reading Your Mail
C-d 6.8 Navigating
C-f 3.3 Processing Mail
C-h C-h 4 Using This Manual
C-h C-k i 4 Using This Manual
C-h i Preface
C-h i 4 Using This Manual
C-h m 3.1 Sending Mail
C-h m 3.3 Processing Mail
C-h m 4 Using This Manual
C-h t Preface
C-h t 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
C-n 3.3 Processing Mail
C-n 6.8 Navigating
C-o 9.1 Editing the Message
C-p 3.3 Processing Mail
C-p 6.8 Navigating
C-<SPC> 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
C-u 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
C-u, with ranges 4.2 Ranges
C-x 5 0 12 The Speedbar
C-x b 3.4 Leaving MH-E
C-x C-c 3.4 Leaving MH-E
C-x k 3.4 Leaving MH-E
C-x k 9.10 Killing the Draft

D
d 3.3 Processing Mail
d 6 Reading Your Mail
d 6.4 Digests
d 6.8 Navigating
d 18 Using Sequences
D ? 6 Reading Your Mail
D b 6 Reading Your Mail
D b 6.4 Digests
D <BS> 6 Reading Your Mail
D <BS> 6.4 Digests
D <SPC> 6 Reading Your Mail
D <SPC> 6.4 Digests
<DEL> 3.2 Receiving Mail

E
e 8 Sending Mail
E 8 Sending Mail
e 8.4 Redistributing Your Mail
e 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages
e 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages
E 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages

F
f 8 Sending Mail
f 8.3 Forwarding Mail
F ' 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F ' 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F ' 18 Using Sequences
F ? 3.3 Processing Mail
F ? 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F c 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F k 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F k 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F k 15 Searching Through Messages
F l 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F l 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F l MH-E Buffers
F n 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F n 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F p 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F p 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F p 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F q 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F q 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F r 3.2 Receiving Mail
F r 6 Reading Your Mail
F r 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F r 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F r 15 Searching Through Messages
F s 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F S 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F s 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F S 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F S 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F s 15 Searching Through Messages
F s 15 Searching Through Messages
F s 15 Searching Through Messages
F s 15 Searching Through Messages
F s 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches
F u 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F u 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F v 6 Reading Your Mail
F v 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F v 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
F v 12 The Speedbar
F v drafts 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages

G
g 6 Reading Your Mail
g 6.8 Navigating

I
i 3.3 Processing Mail
i 5 Incorporating Your Mail
i 5 Incorporating Your Mail
i 5 Incorporating Your Mail
I * 5 Incorporating Your Mail

J
J ? 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
J b 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
J b 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
J b SpamAssassin
J b Bogofilter
J b SpamProbe
J w 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
J w 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
J w SpamAssassin
J w Bogofilter
J w SpamProbe

K
k 6 Reading Your Mail
k 6.8 Navigating
k 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
k 16 Viewing Message Threads
K ? 6 Reading Your Mail
K a 6 Reading Your Mail
K a 6.2 Viewing Attachments
K e 6 Reading Your Mail
K e 6.2 Viewing Attachments
K i 6 Reading Your Mail
K i 6.2 Viewing Attachments
K o 6 Reading Your Mail
K o 6.2 Viewing Attachments
K S-<TAB> 6 Reading Your Mail
K S-<TAB> 6.2 Viewing Attachments
K t 6 Reading Your Mail
K t 6.2 Viewing Attachments
K <TAB> 6 Reading Your Mail
K <TAB> 6.2 Viewing Attachments
K v 6 Reading Your Mail
K v 6.2 Viewing Attachments

L
l 6.7 Files and Pipes

M
m 3.3 Processing Mail
M 6 Reading Your Mail
M 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
m 8.1 Composing
M-< 6 Reading Your Mail
M-< 6.8 Navigating
M-> 6 Reading Your Mail
M-> 6.8 Navigating
M-d 8 Sending Mail
M-d 8.4 Redistributing Your Mail
M-n 6 Reading Your Mail
M-n 6.8 Navigating
M-p 6 Reading Your Mail
M-p 6.8 Navigating
M-q 9.1 Editing the Message
M-<TAB> 9 Editing a Draft
M-<TAB> 9.1 Editing the Message
M-<TAB> 10 Aliases
M-<TAB> Adding Addresses to Draft
M-x 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
M-x mh-alias-add-address-under-point Adding Aliases
M-x mh-alias-add-alias Adding Aliases
M-x mh-alias-apropos Querying Aliases
M-x mh-alias-grab-from-field Adding Aliases
M-x mh-alias-reload Loading Aliases
M-x mh-rmail 3.2 Receiving Mail
M-x mh-rmail 3.2 Receiving Mail
M-x mh-rmail 3.4 Leaving MH-E
M-x mh-rmail 6 Reading Your Mail
M-x mh-smail 3.1 Sending Mail
M-x mh-smail 3.3 Processing Mail
M-x mh-smail 8 Sending Mail
M-x mh-smail 8.1 Composing
M-x mh-smail-other-window 8.1 Composing
M-x mh-update-sequences 18 Using Sequences
M-x mh-version 20 Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers
M-x mh-version C.1 Bug Reports
M-x mh-version C.4 Getting MH-E
M-x speedbar 12 The Speedbar
mouse-1 6 Reading Your Mail
mouse-1 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mouse-2 6 Reading Your Mail
mouse-2 6 Reading Your Mail
mouse-2 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mouse-2 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mouse-2 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mouse-2 6.3 HTML
mouse-2 12 The Speedbar
mouse-3 12 The Speedbar

N
n 3.2 Receiving Mail
n 3.3 Processing Mail
n 6 Reading Your Mail
n 6.8 Navigating
n 6.8 Navigating
n 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages

O
o 3.3 Processing Mail
o 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
o 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
o 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders

P
p 3.2 Receiving Mail
p 3.3 Processing Mail
p 6 Reading Your Mail
p 6.8 Navigating
p 6.8 Navigating
P ? 6 Reading Your Mail
P C 6 Reading Your Mail
P C 6.6 Printing Your Mail
P F 6 Reading Your Mail
P f 6 Reading Your Mail
P f 6.6 Printing Your Mail
P F 6.6 Printing Your Mail
P f 6.6 Printing Your Mail
P l 6 Reading Your Mail
P l 6.6 Printing Your Mail
P l 6.6 Printing Your Mail
P p 6 Reading Your Mail
P p 6.6 Printing Your Mail
P p 6.6 Printing Your Mail

Q
q 3.4 Leaving MH-E
q 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
q 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
q 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
q 18 Using Sequences

R
r 3.3 Processing Mail
r 8 Sending Mail
r 8.2 Replying to Mail
r 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
<RET> 3.2 Receiving Mail
<RET> 3.3 Processing Mail
<RET> 3.3 Processing Mail
<RET> 6 Reading Your Mail
<RET> 6 Reading Your Mail
<RET> 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
<RET> 6.2 Viewing Attachments
<RET> 6.7 Files and Pipes
<RET> 6.8 Navigating

S
s 8 Sending Mail
S ' 18 Using Sequences
S ' 18 Using Sequences
S ? 18 Using Sequences
S d 18 Using Sequences
S d 18 Using Sequences
S k 18 Using Sequences
S k 18 Using Sequences
S l 18 Using Sequences
S l 18 Using Sequences
S n 18 Using Sequences
S n 18 Using Sequences
S n 18 Using Sequences
S p 18 Using Sequences
S p 18 Using Sequences
S p 18 Using Sequences
S s 18 Using Sequences
S s 18 Using Sequences
S w 18 Using Sequences
S w 18 Using Sequences
S w 18 Using Sequences
S-mouse-2 6.3 HTML
S-<TAB> 9 Editing a Draft
S-<TAB> 9.1 Editing the Message
S-<TAB> 15 Searching Through Messages
S-<TAB> 15 Searching Through Messages
SPC 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
<SPC> 3.2 Receiving Mail
<SPC> 3.3 Processing Mail
<SPC> 6 Reading Your Mail
<SPC> 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
<SPC> 6.4 Digests
<SPC> 9 Editing a Draft
<SPC> 9.1 Editing the Message
<SPC> 10 Aliases
<SPC> Adding Addresses to Draft

T
t 6.4 Digests
t 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
t 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
t 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
T ? 16 Viewing Message Threads
T d 6.8 Navigating
T d 16 Viewing Message Threads
T d 16 Viewing Message Threads
T n 16 Viewing Message Threads
T n 16 Viewing Message Threads
T o 16 Viewing Message Threads
T o 16 Viewing Message Threads
T p 16 Viewing Message Threads
T p 16 Viewing Message Threads
T t 16 Viewing Message Threads
T t 16 Viewing Message Threads
T u 16 Viewing Message Threads
T u 16 Viewing Message Threads
TAB 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
<TAB> 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
<TAB> 9 Editing a Draft
<TAB> 9.1 Editing the Message
<TAB> Adding Addresses to Draft
<TAB> 15 Searching Through Messages
<TAB> 15 Searching Through Messages

U
u 6.8 Navigating
u 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
u 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders

V
v 15 Searching Through Messages
v 15 Searching Through Messages

X
x 3.3 Processing Mail
x 3.4 Leaving MH-E
x 6.8 Navigating
x 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
x 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
x 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
x 18 Using Sequences
X ? 6 Reading Your Mail
X s 6 Reading Your Mail
X s 6.7 Files and Pipes
X s 6.7 Files and Pipes
X u 6 Reading Your Mail

Jump to:   !   '   ,   .   /   :   ;   >   ?   |  
B   C   D   E   F   G   I   J   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   X  

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

Command Index

Jump to:   A   B   C   D   F   G   H   I   K   M   N   O   P   S   T  
Index Entry  Section

A
add-hook 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions

B
backward-char 3.3 Processing Mail
browse-url-at-mouse 6.3 HTML

C
call-process 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
customize-face 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
customize-group 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
customize-group 4.1 Options
customize-option 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
customize-option 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
customize-option 4.1 Options
customize-option 4.1 Options

D
delete-frame 12 The Speedbar
describe-mode 3.1 Sending Mail
describe-mode 3.3 Processing Mail
describe-mode 4 Using This Manual
dired 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
dired-do-rename 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
display-time 5 Incorporating Your Mail
display-time 6 Reading Your Mail

F
fill-paragraph 9.1 Editing the Message
forward-char 3.3 Processing Mail

G
goto-address-at-point 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
goto-address-at-point 8 Sending Mail

H
help-with-tutorial Preface
help-with-tutorial 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions

I
indent-relative 9.1 Editing the Message
ispell-complete-word 9.1 Editing the Message
ispell-message 9.9 Sending a Message

K
kill-buffer 9.10 Killing the Draft

M
mailcap-mime-info 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mailcap-mime-types 9.6 Adding Attachments
mh-alias-add-alias Adding Aliases
mh-alias-apropos 10 Aliases
mh-alias-apropos Querying Aliases
mh-alias-grab-from-field 10 Aliases
mh-alias-minibuffer-confirm-address Adding Addresses to Draft
mh-alias-reload 10 Aliases
mh-alias-reload Loading Aliases
mh-annotate-msg 8 Sending Mail
mh-burst-digest 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-burst-digest 6.4 Digests
mh-catchup 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-check-whom 9 Editing a Draft
mh-check-whom 9.8 Checking Recipients
mh-check-whom MH-E Buffers
mh-compose-forward 9 Editing a Draft
mh-compose-forward Forwarding Multimedia Messages
mh-compose-insertion 9 Editing a Draft
mh-compose-insertion Including Files
mh-copy-msg 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-copy-msg 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-customize 4.1 Options
mh-delete-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-delete-msg 6.8 Navigating
mh-delete-msg-from-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-delete-msg-from-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-delete-msg-no-motion 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-delete-msg-no-motion 6.8 Navigating
mh-delete-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-delete-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-delete-subject 6.8 Navigating
mh-delete-subject-or-thread 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-delete-subject-or-thread 6.8 Navigating
mh-delete-subject-or-thread 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-display-with-external-viewer 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-display-with-external-viewer 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-edit-again 8 Sending Mail
mh-edit-again 8.4 Redistributing Your Mail
mh-edit-again 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages
mh-execute-commands 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-execute-commands 6.8 Navigating
mh-execute-commands 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-execute-commands 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-execute-commands 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-extract-rejected-mail 8 Sending Mail
mh-extract-rejected-mail 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages
mh-find-path 2 Getting Started
mh-first-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-first-msg 6.8 Navigating
mh-folder-inline-mime-part 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-folder-inline-mime-part 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-folder-save-mime-part 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-folder-save-mime-part 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-folder-toggle-mime-part 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-folder-toggle-mime-part 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-forward 8 Sending Mail
mh-forward 8.3 Forwarding Mail
mh-fully-kill-draft 9 Editing a Draft
mh-fully-kill-draft 9.10 Killing the Draft
mh-goto-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-goto-msg 6.8 Navigating
mh-header-display 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-header-display 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-help 4 Using This Manual
mh-help 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-help 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-help 9 Editing a Draft
mh-help 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-help 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-help MH-E Buffers
mh-inc-folder 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-inc-folder 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-inc-folder 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-inc-folder 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-inc-spool-* 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-index-do-search 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-index-do-search 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-index-new-messages 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-index-new-messages 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-index-next-folder 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-index-next-folder 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-index-previous-folder 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-index-previous-folder 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-index-sequenced-messages 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-index-sequenced-messages 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-index-ticked-messages 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-index-ticked-messages 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-index-ticked-messages 18 Using Sequences
mh-index-visit-folder 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-index-visit-folder 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-insert-auto-fields 9 Editing a Draft
mh-insert-auto-fields 11 Identities
mh-insert-auto-fields 11 Identities
mh-insert-identity 9 Editing a Draft
mh-insert-identity 11 Identities
mh-insert-identity 11 Identities
mh-insert-letter 9 Editing a Draft
mh-insert-letter 9.3 Inserting Messages
mh-insert-signature 9 Editing a Draft
mh-insert-signature 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
mh-insert-signature, example 8.1 Composing
mh-junk-blacklist 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-junk-blacklist 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-junk-blacklist SpamAssassin
mh-junk-blacklist Bogofilter
mh-junk-blacklist SpamProbe
mh-junk-whitelist 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-junk-whitelist 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-junk-whitelist SpamAssassin
mh-junk-whitelist Bogofilter
mh-junk-whitelist SpamProbe
mh-kill-folder 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
mh-kill-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-kill-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-kill-folder 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-last-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-last-msg 6.8 Navigating
mh-letter-complete 9 Editing a Draft
mh-letter-complete 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-letter-complete 10 Aliases
mh-letter-complete Adding Addresses to Draft
mh-letter-complete-or-space 9 Editing a Draft
mh-letter-complete-or-space 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-letter-complete-or-space 10 Aliases
mh-letter-complete-or-space Adding Addresses to Draft
mh-letter-confirm-address 9 Editing a Draft
mh-letter-confirm-address 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-letter-confirm-address Adding Addresses to Draft
mh-letter-next-header-field-or-indent 9 Editing a Draft
mh-letter-next-header-field-or-indent 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-letter-previous-header-field 9 Editing a Draft
mh-letter-previous-header-field 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-letter-toggle-header-field-display 9 Editing a Draft
mh-letter-toggle-header-field-display 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-list-folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-list-folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-list-folders MH-E Buffers
mh-list-sequences 18 Using Sequences
mh-list-sequences 18 Using Sequences
mh-mh-compose-anon-ftp 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mh-compose-anon-ftp Including an FTP Reference
mh-mh-compose-anon-ftp Including tar Files
mh-mh-compose-external-compressed-tar 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mh-compose-external-compressed-tar Including tar Files
mh-mh-compose-external-type 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mh-compose-external-type Including Other External Files
mh-mh-to-mime 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mh-to-mime Previewing Multimedia Messages
mh-mh-to-mime-undo 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mh-to-mime-undo Previewing Multimedia Messages
mh-mime-save-parts 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-mime-save-parts 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-mml-secure-message-encrypt 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mml-secure-message-encrypt 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mml-secure-message-encrypt 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
mh-mml-secure-message-sign 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mml-secure-message-sign 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mml-secure-message-sign 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
mh-mml-secure-message-signencrypt 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mml-secure-message-signencrypt 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mml-secure-message-signencrypt 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
mh-mml-to-mime 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mml-to-mime Previewing Multimedia Messages
mh-mml-to-mime Previewing Multimedia Messages
mh-mml-unsecure-message 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mml-unsecure-message 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
mh-modify 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-modify 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
mh-msg-is-in-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-msg-is-in-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-narrow-to-cc 17 Limiting Display
mh-narrow-to-cc 17 Limiting Display
mh-narrow-to-from 17 Limiting Display
mh-narrow-to-from 17 Limiting Display
mh-narrow-to-range 17 Limiting Display
mh-narrow-to-range 17 Limiting Display
mh-narrow-to-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-narrow-to-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-narrow-to-subject 17 Limiting Display
mh-narrow-to-subject 17 Limiting Display
mh-narrow-to-tick 17 Limiting Display
mh-narrow-to-tick 17 Limiting Display
mh-narrow-to-tick 18 Using Sequences
mh-narrow-to-tick 18 Using Sequences
mh-narrow-to-to 17 Limiting Display
mh-narrow-to-to 17 Limiting Display
mh-next-button 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-next-button 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-next-undeleted-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-next-undeleted-msg 6.8 Navigating
mh-next-unread-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-next-unread-msg 6.8 Navigating
mh-open-line 9 Editing a Draft
mh-open-line 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-pack-folder 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
mh-pack-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-pack-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-page-digest 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-page-digest 6.4 Digests
mh-page-digest-backwards 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-page-digest-backwards 6.4 Digests
mh-page-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-page-msg 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-pick-do-search 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-pick-do-search 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-pipe-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-pipe-msg 6.7 Files and Pipes
mh-prefix-help 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-prefix-help 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-prefix-help 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-prefix-help 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-prefix-help 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-prefix-help 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-prefix-help 17 Limiting Display
mh-prefix-help 18 Using Sequences
mh-prefix-help 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-press-button 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-press-button 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-prev-button 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-prev-button 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-previous-page 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-previous-page 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-previous-undeleted-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-previous-undeleted-msg 6.8 Navigating
mh-previous-unread-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-previous-unread-msg 6.8 Navigating
mh-print-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-print-msg 6.6 Printing Your Mail
mh-ps-print-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-ps-print-msg 6.6 Printing Your Mail
mh-ps-print-msg-file 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-ps-print-msg-file 6.6 Printing Your Mail
mh-ps-print-toggle-color 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-ps-print-toggle-color 6.6 Printing Your Mail
mh-ps-print-toggle-faces 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-ps-print-toggle-faces 6.6 Printing Your Mail
mh-put-msg-in-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-put-msg-in-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-quit 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-quit 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-redistribute 8 Sending Mail
mh-redistribute 8.4 Redistributing Your Mail
mh-refile-msg 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-refile-msg 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-refile-or-write-again 6.7 Files and Pipes
mh-refile-or-write-again 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-reply 8 Sending Mail
mh-reply 8.2 Replying to Mail
mh-rescan-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-rescan-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-rescan-folder 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-rescan-folder, example 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-rmail 3.2 Receiving Mail
mh-rmail 3.2 Receiving Mail
mh-rmail 3.4 Leaving MH-E
mh-rmail 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-rmail, example 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
mh-search 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-search 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-search 14 The Tool Bar
mh-search 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-search 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches
mh-search-folder 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-search-p 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-send 8 Sending Mail
mh-send 8.1 Composing
mh-send-letter 9 Editing a Draft
mh-send-letter 9.9 Sending a Message
mh-set-cmd-note Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-set-cmd-note Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-set-cmd-note Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-show 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show, example 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-show-mouse 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-mouse 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-preferred-alternative 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-preferred-alternative 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-signature-separator-p 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
mh-smail 3.1 Sending Mail
mh-smail 3.3 Processing Mail
mh-smail 8 Sending Mail
mh-smail 8 Sending Mail
mh-smail 8.1 Composing
mh-smail-other-window 8 Sending Mail
mh-smail-other-window 8.1 Composing
mh-sort-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-sort-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-speed-contract-folder 12 The Speedbar
mh-speed-expand-folder 12 The Speedbar
mh-speed-refresh 12 The Speedbar
mh-speed-view 12 The Speedbar
mh-store-buffer 6.7 Files and Pipes
mh-store-msg 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-store-msg 6.7 Files and Pipes
mh-thread-ancestor 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-thread-ancestor 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-thread-delete 6.8 Navigating
mh-thread-delete 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-thread-delete 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-thread-next-sibling 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-thread-next-sibling 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-thread-previous-sibling 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-thread-previous-sibling 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-thread-refile 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-thread-refile 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-to-fcc 9 Editing a Draft
mh-to-fcc 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-to-field 9 Editing a Draft
mh-to-field 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-to-field 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-to-field 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-toggle-mh-decode-mime-flag 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-toggle-mh-decode-mime-flag 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-toggle-mime-buttons 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-toggle-mime-buttons 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-toggle-showing 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-toggle-showing 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-toggle-threads 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-toggle-threads 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-toggle-tick 18 Using Sequences
mh-toggle-tick 18 Using Sequences
mh-undo 6.8 Navigating
mh-undo 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-undo 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-undo-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-undo-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-update-sequences 18 Using Sequences
mh-update-sequences 18 Using Sequences
mh-version 2 Getting Started
mh-version 20 Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers
mh-visit-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-visit-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-visit-folder 12 The Speedbar
mh-widen 17 Limiting Display
mh-widen 17 Limiting Display
mh-widen 18 Using Sequences
mh-widen 18 Using Sequences
mh-write-msg-to-file 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-write-msg-to-file 6.7 Files and Pipes
mh-write-msg-to-file 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-yank-behavior 9.3 Inserting Messages
mh-yank-cur-msg 9 Editing a Draft
mh-yank-cur-msg 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
minibuffer-complete Adding Addresses to Draft

N
next-line 3.3 Processing Mail
next-line 6.8 Navigating

O
open-line 9.1 Editing the Message

P
previous-line 3.3 Processing Mail
previous-line 6.8 Navigating

S
setq 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
setq Appendix A Scan Line Formats

T
trivial-cite 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying

Jump to:   A   B   C   D   F   G   H   I   K   M   N   O   P   S   T  

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

Option (Variable) Index

Jump to:   E   G   M   N   P   R   S   T  
Index Entry  Section

E
exec-path 2 Getting Started

G
gnus-emphasis-alist 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
gnus-secondary-select-methods Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
goto-address-highlight-p 6.1 Viewing Your Mail

M
mail-citation-hook 9 Editing a Draft
mail-citation-hook 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mail-citation-hook 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mail-citation-hook 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mail-mode-hook 8.1 Composing
mail-sources Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
mail-user-agent 8 Sending Mail
mail-user-agent Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
message-mail-user-agent Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-adaptive-cmd-note-flag Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-after-commands-processed-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-after-commands-processed-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-alias-completion-ignore-case-flag 10 Aliases
mh-alias-completion-ignore-case-flag Adding Addresses to Draft
mh-alias-expand-aliases-flag 10 Aliases
mh-alias-expand-aliases-flag Adding Addresses to Draft
mh-alias-flash-on-comma 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-alias-flash-on-comma 10 Aliases
mh-alias-flash-on-comma Adding Addresses to Draft
mh-alias-insert-file 10 Aliases
mh-alias-insert-file Adding Aliases
mh-alias-insert-file Adding Aliases
mh-alias-insertion-location 10 Aliases
mh-alias-insertion-location Adding Aliases
mh-alias-insertion-location Adding Aliases
mh-alias-local-users 10 Aliases
mh-alias-local-users Loading Aliases
mh-alias-local-users-prefix 10 Aliases
mh-alias-local-users-prefix Loading Aliases
mh-alias-local-users-prefix Loading Aliases
mh-alias-passwd-gecos-comma-separator-flag 10 Aliases
mh-alias-passwd-gecos-comma-separator-flag Loading Aliases
mh-alias-reloaded-hook 10 Aliases
mh-alias-reloaded-hook Loading Aliases
mh-annotate-list 8 Sending Mail
mh-annotate-msg-hook 8 Sending Mail
mh-annotate-msg-hook 8 Sending Mail
mh-auto-fields-list 11 Identities
mh-auto-fields-list 11 Identities
mh-auto-fields-list 11 Identities
mh-auto-fields-prompt-flag 11 Identities
mh-auto-fields-prompt-flag 11 Identities
mh-before-commands-processed-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-before-commands-processed-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-before-quit-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-before-quit-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-before-quit-hook, example 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-before-send-letter-hook 9 Editing a Draft
mh-before-send-letter-hook 9.9 Sending a Message
mh-blacklist-msg-hook 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-bury-show-buffer-flag 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-bury-show-buffer-flag 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
mh-bury-show-buffer-flag, example 4.1 Options
mh-clean-message-header-flag 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-clean-message-header-flag 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-cmd-note Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-compose-forward-as-mime-flag 8 Sending Mail
mh-compose-forward-as-mime-flag 8.3 Forwarding Mail
mh-compose-insertion 9 Editing a Draft
mh-compose-insertion 9.6 Adding Attachments
mh-compose-insertion Including Files
mh-compose-letter-function 8 Sending Mail
mh-compose-letter-function 8.1 Composing
mh-compose-prompt-flag 8 Sending Mail
mh-compose-prompt-flag 8.1 Composing
mh-compose-prompt-flag Adding Addresses to Draft
mh-compose-prompt-flag Adding Addresses to Draft
mh-compose-skipped-header-fields 9 Editing a Draft
mh-compose-skipped-header-fields 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-compose-space-does-completion-flag 9 Editing a Draft
mh-compose-space-does-completion-flag 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-current-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-current-folder 8 Sending Mail
mh-decode-mime-flag 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-decode-mime-flag 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-decode-mime-flag 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-default-folder-for-message-function 4.3 Folder Selection
mh-default-folder-for-message-function 4.3 Folder Selection
mh-default-folder-list 4.3 Folder Selection
mh-default-folder-list 4.3 Folder Selection
mh-default-folder-must-exist-flag 4.3 Folder Selection
mh-default-folder-must-exist-flag 4.3 Folder Selection
mh-default-folder-prefix 4.3 Folder Selection
mh-default-folder-prefix 4.3 Folder Selection
mh-delete-msg-hook 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-delete-msg-hook 6.8 Navigating
mh-delete-yanked-msg-window-flag 9 Editing a Draft
mh-delete-yanked-msg-window-flag 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-delete-yanked-msg-window-flag 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-display-buttons-for-alternatives-flag 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-display-buttons-for-alternatives-flag 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-display-buttons-for-inline-parts-flag 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-display-buttons-for-inline-parts-flag 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-do-not-confirm-flag 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-do-not-confirm-flag 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
mh-draft-folder 2 Getting Started
mh-extract-from-attribution-verb 9 Editing a Draft
mh-extract-from-attribution-verb 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-extract-from-attribution-verb 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-fetch-x-image-url 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-fetch-x-image-url 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-find-path-hook 2 Getting Started
mh-flists-present-flag 2 Getting Started
mh-folder-address 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-address Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-blacklisted 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-folder-body 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-body Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-cur-msg-number 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-cur-msg-number Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-date 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-date Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-deleted 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-deleted Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-followup 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-followup Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-font-lock-keywords Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-font-lock-keywords Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-font-lock-keywords Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-font-lock-keywords Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-font-lock-keywords Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-font-lock-keywords Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-font-lock-keywords Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-font-lock-keywords Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-font-lock-keywords Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-mode-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-mode-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-mode-hook, example 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-msg-number 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-msg-number Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-refiled 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-refiled Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-scan-format 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-sent-to-me-hint 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-sent-to-me-sender Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-subject 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-subject Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-tick 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-to 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-to Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-folder-whitelisted 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-forward-hook 8 Sending Mail
mh-forward-hook 8.3 Forwarding Mail
mh-forward-subject-format 8 Sending Mail
mh-forward-subject-format 8.3 Forwarding Mail
mh-graphical-emphasis-flag 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-graphical-emphasis-flag 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-graphical-smileys-flag 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-graphical-smileys-flag 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-highlight-citation-style 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-highlight-citation-style 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-identity-default 11 Identities
mh-identity-default 11 Identities
mh-identity-handlers 11 Identities
mh-identity-handlers 11 Identities
mh-identity-list 11 Identities
mh-identity-list 11 Identities
mh-identity-list 11 Identities
mh-identity-list 11 Identities
mh-identity-list 11 Identities
mh-inbox 2 Getting Started
mh-inc-folder-hook 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-inc-folder-hook 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-inc-folder-hook, example 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-inc-prog 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-inc-prog 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-inc-spool-list 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-inc-spool-list 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-ins-buf-prefix 9 Editing a Draft
mh-ins-buf-prefix 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-ins-buf-prefix 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-ins-buf-prefix 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-ins-buf-prefix 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-ins-buf-prefix 9.3 Inserting Messages
mh-insert-signature-hook 9 Editing a Draft
mh-insert-signature-hook 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
mh-insert-x-mailer-flag 8 Sending Mail
mh-insert-x-mailer-flag 8.1 Composing
mh-interpret-number-as-range-flag 4.2 Ranges
mh-interpret-number-as-range-flag 4.2 Ranges
mh-invisible-header-fields 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-invisible-header-fields 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-invisible-header-fields-compiled 9.3 Inserting Messages
mh-invisible-header-fields-default 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-invisible-header-fields-default 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-junk-background 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-junk-background 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-junk-disposition 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-junk-disposition 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-junk-program 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-junk-program 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-kill-folder-suppress-prompt-functions 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-kill-folder-suppress-prompt-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-large-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-large-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-large-folder 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-large-folder 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-letter-complete-function 9 Editing a Draft
mh-letter-complete-function 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-letter-fill-column 9 Editing a Draft
mh-letter-fill-column 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-letter-header-field 9 Editing a Draft
mh-letter-header-field 9.1 Editing the Message
mh-letter-mode-hook 8 Sending Mail
mh-letter-mode-hook 8.1 Composing
mh-letter-mode-hook 8.1 Composing
mh-lib 2 Getting Started
mh-lib-progs 2 Getting Started
mh-lpr-command-format 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-lpr-command-format 6.6 Printing Your Mail
mh-lpr-command-format 6.6 Printing Your Mail
mh-lpr-command-format, example 4.1 Options
mh-max-inline-image-height 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-max-inline-image-height 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-max-inline-image-width 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-max-inline-image-width 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-mh-folder-sent-to-me-hint Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-mh-to-mime-args Previewing Multimedia Messages
mh-mh-to-mime-hook 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mh-to-mime-hook Previewing Multimedia Messages
mh-mhl-format-file 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-mhl-format-file 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-mhl-format-file, example 4.1 Options
mh-mime-save-parts-default-directory 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-mime-save-parts-default-directory 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-mime-save-parts-default-directory 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mh-mml-method-default 9 Editing a Draft
mh-mml-method-default 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
mh-mml-method-default 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
mh-new-messages-folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-new-messages-folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-new-messages-folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-new-messages-folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-note-copied Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-note-cur Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-note-cur Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-note-deleted Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-note-deleted Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-note-dist Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-note-forw Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-note-printed Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-note-refiled Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-note-refiled Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-note-repl Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-note-seq Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-pack-folder-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-pack-folder-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-path 2 Getting Started
mh-previous-seq 2 Getting Started
mh-print-background-flag 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-print-background-flag 6.6 Printing Your Mail
mh-print-background-flag 6.6 Printing Your Mail
mh-progs 2 Getting Started
mh-progs 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-progs Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-quit-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-quit-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-quit-hook, example 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-recenter-summary-flag 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-recenter-summary-flag 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-recursive-folders-flag 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-recursive-folders-flag 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-recursive-folders-flag 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-redist-full-contents-flag 8 Sending Mail
mh-redist-full-contents-flag 8.4 Redistributing Your Mail
mh-refile-msg-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-refile-msg-hook 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-refile-preserves-sequences-flag 18 Using Sequences
mh-refile-preserves-sequences-flag 18 Using Sequences
mh-reply-default-reply-to 8 Sending Mail
mh-reply-default-reply-to 8.2 Replying to Mail
mh-reply-show-message-flag 8 Sending Mail
mh-reply-show-message-flag 8.2 Replying to Mail
mh-scan-body-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-cur-msg-number-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-cur-msg-number-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-cur-msg-number-regexp, example Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-date-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-deleted-msg-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-deleted-msg-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-deleted-msg-regexp, example Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-file Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-file Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-file Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-file Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-file Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-file Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-file Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-file, example Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-mh Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-mh Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-mh Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-nmh 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-scan-format-nmh 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-scan-format-nmh Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-nmh Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-format-nmh Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-good-msg-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-good-msg-regexp, example Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-msg-format-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-msg-format-string Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-msg-number-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-msg-number-regexp, example Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-msg-overflow-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-msg-search-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-msg-search-regexp, example Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-prog Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-prog Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-rcpt-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-refiled-msg-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-refiled-msg-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-refiled-msg-regexp, example Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-sent-to-me-sender-regexp 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-scan-sent-to-me-sender-regexp 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-scan-sent-to-me-sender-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-sent-to-me-sender-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-subject-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-valid-regexp Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-scan-valid-regexp, example Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-search-folder 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-search-folder 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-search-mode-hook 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-search-mode-hook 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-search-program 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-search-program 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches
mh-seen-list 18 Using Sequences
mh-send-prog 9.9 Sending a Message
mh-show-buffer-mode-line-buffer-id 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-buffer-mode-line-buffer-id 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-cc 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-cc 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-date 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-date 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-from 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-from 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-header 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-header 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-hook 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-hook 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-maximum-size 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-maximum-size 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-mode-hook 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-mode-hook 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-pgg-bad 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-pgg-bad 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
mh-show-pgg-good 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-pgg-good 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
mh-show-pgg-unknown 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-pgg-unknown 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
mh-show-signature 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-signature 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-subject 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-subject 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-threads-flag 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-show-threads-flag 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-show-to 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-to 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-use-xface-flag 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-use-xface-flag 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-show-xface 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-show-xface 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mh-signature-file-name 9 Editing a Draft
mh-signature-file-name 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
mh-signature-file-name 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
mh-signature-file-name 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
mh-signature-file-name 11 Identities
mh-signature-separator 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
mh-signature-separator-flag 9 Editing a Draft
mh-signature-separator-flag 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
mh-signature-separator-regexp 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
mh-sortm-args 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-sortm-args 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-speed-update-interval 12 The Speedbar
mh-speedbar-folder 12 The Speedbar
mh-speedbar-folder-with-unseen-messages 12 The Speedbar
mh-speedbar-selected-folder 12 The Speedbar
mh-speedbar-selected-folder-with-unseen-messages 12 The Speedbar
mh-store-default-directory 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-store-default-directory 6.7 Files and Pipes
mh-summary-height 6 Reading Your Mail
mh-summary-height 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
mh-sys-path 2 Getting Started
mh-tick-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-tick-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-tick-seq 18 Using Sequences
mh-ticked-messages-folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-ticked-messages-folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-ticked-messages-folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons 14 The Tool Bar
mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons 14 The Tool Bar
mh-tool-bar-letter-buttons 14 The Tool Bar
mh-tool-bar-letter-buttons 14 The Tool Bar
mh-tool-bar-search-function 14 The Tool Bar
mh-tool-bar-search-function 14 The Tool Bar
mh-unseen-seq 2 Getting Started
mh-unseen-updated-hook 18 Using Sequences
mh-unseen-updated-hook 18 Using Sequences
mh-update-sequences-after-mh-show-flag 18 Using Sequences
mh-update-sequences-after-mh-show-flag 18 Using Sequences
mh-user-path 2 Getting Started
mh-variant 2 Getting Started
mh-variant-in-use 2 Getting Started
mh-whitelist-msg-hook 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-whitelist-preserves-sequences-flag 18 Using Sequences
mh-whitelist-preserves-sequences-flag 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-whitelist-preserves-sequences-flag 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-x-face-file 9 Editing a Draft
mh-x-face-file 9.5 Inserting Your Picture
mh-x-face-file 9.5 Inserting Your Picture
mh-xemacs-tool-bar-position 14 The Tool Bar
mh-xemacs-tool-bar-position 14 The Tool Bar
mh-xemacs-use-tool-bar-flag 14 The Tool Bar
mh-xemacs-use-tool-bar-flag 14 The Tool Bar
mh-yank-behavior 8.2 Replying to Mail
mh-yank-behavior 9 Editing a Draft
mh-yank-behavior 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-yank-behavior 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-yank-behavior 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-yank-behavior 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-yank-behavior 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
mh-yank-behavior 9.3 Inserting Messages
mm-discouraged-alternatives 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mm-text-html-renderer 6.3 HTML
mm-text-html-renderer 6.3 HTML
mm-text-html-renderer 6.3 HTML

N
nnmail-keep-last-article Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively

P
pgg-encrypt-for-me 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
ps-print-color-p 6.6 Printing Your Mail

R
read-mail-command 6 Reading Your Mail

S
set-mh-cmd-note, example Appendix A Scan Line Formats

T
text-mode-hook 8.1 Composing
transient-mark-mode 4.2 Ranges

Jump to:   E   G   M   N   P   R   S   T  

[ << ] [ < ] [ Up ] [ > ] [ >> ]         [Top] [Contents] [Index] [ ? ]

Concept Index

Jump to:   *   +   .   /   ~  
A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   J   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   W   X   Y  
<
Index Entry  Section

*
*MH-E Folders* 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
*MH-E Folders* MH-E Buffers
*MH-E Help* MH-E Buffers
*MH-E Info* 20 Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers
*MH-E Info* MH-E Buffers
*MH-E Log* 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
*MH-E Log* MH-E Buffers
*MH-E Mail Delivery* 9.9 Sending a Message
*MH-E Mail Delivery* MH-E Buffers
*MH-E Recipients* 9.8 Checking Recipients
*MH-E Recipients* MH-E Buffers
*MH-E Sequences* 18 Using Sequences
*MH-E Sequences* MH-E Buffers
*mh-temp* MH-E Buffers

+
+inbox 5 Incorporating Your Mail
+inbox 6 Reading Your Mail
+mhe-index 15 Searching Through Messages

.
.emacs 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
.emacs 2 Getting Started
.emacs 5 Incorporating Your Mail
.emacs 6.3 HTML
.emacs 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
.emacs 8.1 Composing
.face 9.5 Inserting Your Picture
.mhe-x-image-cache 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
.mh_profile 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
.mh_profile 8.3 Forwarding Mail
.procmailrc 5 Incorporating Your Mail
.procmailrc 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
.procmailrc Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
.signature 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
.spamassassin/user_prefs SpamAssassin

/
/etc/mailcap 6.2 Viewing Attachments
/etc/mime.types 9.6 Adding Attachments
/etc/nmh/MailAliases Loading Aliases
/etc/passwd Loading Aliases

~
~ 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions

A
abnormal hooks 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
ali Loading Aliases
alias completion 9.1 Editing the Message
aliases 10 Aliases
Aliasfile’ MH profile component Loading Aliases
alternatives 6.2 Viewing Attachments
ancestor, in threads 16 Viewing Message Threads
attachments 6.2 Viewing Attachments
attachments, alternatives 6.2 Viewing Attachments
attachments, inline 6.2 Viewing Attachments
attachments, inserting Including Files
attachments, saving 6.2 Viewing Attachments
attachments, viewing 6.2 Viewing Attachments

B
Bcc’ header field 9.1 Editing the Message
Bill Wohler Preface
Bill Wohler Appendix D History of MH-E
Bill Wohler D.4 From Bill Wohler
blacklisting 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
body parts 6.2 Viewing Attachments
bogofilter 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
bogofilter Bogofilter
boldface, showing 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
Brian Reid Appendix D History of MH-E
Brian Reid D.1 From Brian Reid
browser, ‘gnus-w3m 6.3 HTML
browser, ‘html2text 6.3 HTML
browser, ‘links 6.3 HTML
browser, ‘lynx 6.3 HTML
browser, ‘w3m 6.3 HTML
browser, ‘w3m 6.3 HTML
browser, ‘w3m 6.3 HTML
browser, ‘w3m-standalone 6.3 HTML
buffers, ‘*MH-E Folders* 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
buffers, ‘*MH-E Folders* MH-E Buffers
buffers, ‘*MH-E Help* MH-E Buffers
buffers, ‘*MH-E Info* 20 Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers
buffers, ‘*MH-E Info* MH-E Buffers
buffers, ‘*MH-E Log* 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
buffers, ‘*MH-E Log* MH-E Buffers
buffers, ‘*MH-E Mail Delivery* 9.9 Sending a Message
buffers, ‘*MH-E Mail Delivery* MH-E Buffers
buffers, ‘*MH-E Recipients* 9.8 Checking Recipients
buffers, ‘*MH-E Recipients* MH-E Buffers
buffers, ‘*MH-E Sequences* 18 Using Sequences
buffers, ‘*MH-E Sequences* MH-E Buffers
buffers, ‘*mh-temp* MH-E Buffers
bugs C.1 Bug Reports
built-in help 4 Using This Manual
burst 6.4 Digests
buttons 6.2 Viewing Attachments

C
Cc’ header field 9.1 Editing the Message
change log C.4 Getting MH-E
checking recipients 9.8 Checking Recipients
citations, highlighting 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
commands 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
commands, MH 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
commands, shell 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
commands, Unix 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
compface 9.5 Inserting Your Picture
completion 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
completion 9.1 Editing the Message
completion, folders 4.3 Folder Selection
components 8.1 Composing
composing mail 8.1 Composing
content description 9.6 Adding Attachments
Content-Disposition’ header field 6.2 Viewing Attachments
Content-Transfer-Encoding’ header field Other Things You Can Do
Content-Type’ header field Other Things You Can Do
contributed software C.4 Getting MH-E
conventions, Emacs 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
conventions, key names 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
convert 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
cur’ sequence 18 Using Sequences
cur’ sequence 18 Using Sequences
cur’ sequence 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
customization group, ‘mh 4.1 Options
customization group, ‘mh-alias 10 Aliases
customization group, ‘mh-folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
customization group, ‘mh-folder-selection 4.3 Folder Selection
customization group, ‘mh-identity 11 Identities
customization group, ‘mh-inc 5 Incorporating Your Mail
customization group, ‘mh-junk 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
customization group, ‘mh-letter 9 Editing a Draft
customization group, ‘mh-range 4.2 Ranges
customization group, ‘mh-scan-line-formats Appendix A Scan Line Formats
customization group, ‘mh-search 15 Searching Through Messages
customization group, ‘mh-sending-mail 8 Sending Mail
customization group, ‘mh-sequences 18 Using Sequences
customization group, ‘mh-sequences 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
customization group, ‘mh-show 6 Reading Your Mail
customization group, ‘mh-speedbar 12 The Speedbar
customization group, ‘mh-thread 16 Viewing Message Threads
customization group, ‘mh-tool-bar 14 The Tool Bar
customization group, ‘pgg 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
customization group, ‘pgg 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
customizing MH-E 4.1 Options

D
Dcc’ header field 9.1 Editing the Message
Debian 2 Getting Started
Debian C.4 Getting MH-E
decoding RFC 2047 Appendix A Scan Line Formats
decrypting messages 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
deleting messages 6.8 Navigating
digests 6.4 Digests
dist 8.4 Redistributing Your Mail
documentation C.4 Getting MH-E
draft 8.1 Composing
draft 8.2 Replying to Mail
draft 8.3 Forwarding Mail
draft 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages
draft 9 Editing a Draft
draft folder 8.1 Composing
Draft-Folder’ MH profile component 2 Getting Started

E
editing draft 9 Editing a Draft
editing header 9.1 Editing the Message
editing message 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
Emacs Preface
Emacs 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs commands 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs Lisp Manual 4 Using This Manual
Emacs, built-in help 4 Using This Manual
Emacs, completion 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, conventions 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, customizing 4.1 Options
Emacs, Emacs Lisp Manual 4 Using This Manual
Emacs, faces 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, file completion 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, folder completion 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, info 4 Using This Manual
Emacs, info 4 Using This Manual
Emacs, interrupting 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, mark 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, minibuffer 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, notification of new mail 5 Incorporating Your Mail
Emacs, online help 4 Using This Manual
Emacs, options 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, packages, mm-decode 6.2 Viewing Attachments
Emacs, packages, ps-print 6.6 Printing Your Mail
Emacs, packages, supercite 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
Emacs, packages, trivial-cite 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
Emacs, packages, x-face 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
Emacs, point 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, prefix argument 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, quitting 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, quitting 3.4 Leaving MH-E
Emacs, region 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, setting options 4.1 Options
Emacs, terms 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Emacs, variables 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
emacsclient 5 Incorporating Your Mail
email addresses, highlighting 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
emphasis 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
encrypted messages 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
encrypting messages 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
exiting 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
exporting folders 3.4 Leaving MH-E
expunging refiles and deletes 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders

F
Face’ header field 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
Face’ header field 9.5 Inserting Your Picture
faces 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
FAQ C.3 MH FAQ and Support
Fcc’ header field 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
Fcc’ header field 11 Identities
file 9.6 Adding Attachments
file completion 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
files 6.7 Files and Pipes
files, ‘.emacs 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
files, ‘.emacs 2 Getting Started
files, ‘.emacs 5 Incorporating Your Mail
files, ‘.emacs 6.3 HTML
files, ‘.emacs 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
files, ‘.emacs 8.1 Composing
files, ‘.face 9.5 Inserting Your Picture
files, ‘.mhe-x-image-cache 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
files, ‘.mh_profile 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
files, ‘.mh_profile 8.3 Forwarding Mail
files, ‘.procmailrc 5 Incorporating Your Mail
files, ‘.procmailrc 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
files, ‘.procmailrc Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
files, ‘.signature 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
files, ‘.spamassassin/user_prefs SpamAssassin
files, ‘/etc/mailcap 6.2 Viewing Attachments
files, ‘/etc/mime.types 9.6 Adding Attachments
files, ‘/etc/nmh/MailAliases Loading Aliases
files, ‘/etc/passwd Loading Aliases
files, ‘components 8.1 Composing
files, ‘draft 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages
files, ‘MH-E-NEWS C.4 Getting MH-E
files, ‘mhl.reply 8.2 Replying to Mail
files, ‘README C.4 Getting MH-E
filling paragraphs 9.1 Editing the Message
filters 17 Limiting Display
flists 12 The Speedbar
folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Folder > Incorporate New Mail’ menu item 5 Incorporating Your Mail
Folder > List Folders’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Folder > Pack Folder’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Folder > Quit MH-E’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Folder > Rescan Folder’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Folder > Search...’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Folder > Sort Folder’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Folder > Toggle Show/Folder’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Folder > View New Messages’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Folder > Visit a Folder...’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
folder completion 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Folder’ menu 5 Incorporating Your Mail
Folder’ menu 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Folder’ menu 13 The Menu Bar
Folder menu 13 The Menu Bar
folder navigation 12 The Speedbar
folders 3.3 Processing Mail
folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
folders, ‘+mhe-index 15 Searching Through Messages
folders, completion 4.3 Folder Selection
folders, exporting 3.4 Leaving MH-E
folders, renaming 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
folders, selecting 4.3 Folder Selection
formail SpamProbe
forw 8.3 Forwarding Mail
forw’ MH profile component 8.3 Forwarding Mail
forwarding 8.3 Forwarding Mail
From’ header field 9.1 Editing the Message
From’ header field 11 Identities
ftp Including an FTP Reference
ftp Including tar Files
full training Bogofilter
functions 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions

G
getting MH-E C.4 Getting MH-E
Gildea, Stephen Appendix D History of MH-E
Gildea, Stephen D.3 From Stephen Gildea
GNU mailutils MH 2 Getting Started
gnuclient 5 Incorporating Your Mail
GnuPG 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
Gnus 6.3 HTML
Gnus 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
Gnus Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
gnus-w3m 6.3 HTML
gnuserv 5 Incorporating Your Mail
GPG 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
grep 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches
grep 15.1.6 grep

H
ham 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
header field, ‘Bcc 9.1 Editing the Message
header field, ‘Cc 9.1 Editing the Message
header field, ‘Content-Disposition 6.2 Viewing Attachments
header field, ‘Content-Transfer-Encoding Other Things You Can Do
header field, ‘Content-Type Other Things You Can Do
header field, ‘Dcc 9.1 Editing the Message
header field, ‘Face 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
header field, ‘Face 9.5 Inserting Your Picture
header field, ‘Fcc 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
header field, ‘Fcc 11 Identities
header field, ‘From 9.1 Editing the Message
header field, ‘From 11 Identities
header field, ‘Mail-Followup-To 9.1 Editing the Message
header field, ‘Mail-Followup-To 11 Identities
header field, ‘Mail-Reply-To 9.1 Editing the Message
header field, ‘Organization 11 Identities
header field, ‘Reply-To 9.1 Editing the Message
header field, ‘Subject 9.1 Editing the Message
header field, ‘Subject Other Things You Can Do
header field, ‘To 9.1 Editing the Message
header field, ‘X-Bogosity Bogofilter
header field, ‘X-Face 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
header field, ‘X-Face 9.5 Inserting Your Picture
header field, ‘X-Image-URL 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
header field, ‘X-Image-URL 9.5 Inserting Your Picture
header field, ‘X-Mailer 8.1 Composing
header field, ‘X-MHE-Checksum 15 Searching Through Messages
header field, ‘X-Spam-Level SpamAssassin
header field, ‘X-Spam-Status SpamAssassin
header field, ‘X-SpamProbe SpamProbe
help 3.1 Sending Mail
help 3.3 Processing Mail
highlighting 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
highlighting citations 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
highlighting email addresses 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
highlighting URLs 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
history 2 Getting Started
history of MH-E Appendix D History of MH-E
hooks 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
HTML 6.3 HTML
html2text 6.3 HTML

I
identities 11 Identities
Identity > Customize Identities’ menu item 11 Identities
Identity > Insert Auto Fields’ menu item 11 Identities
Identity > Save as Default’ menu item 11 Identities
Identity > Set Default for Session’ menu item 11 Identities
Identity’ menu 11 Identities
Identity menu 11 Identities
Identity’ menu 13 The Menu Bar
Identity menu 13 The Menu Bar
ImageMagick 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
images Including Files
inc 3.2 Receiving Mail
inc 5 Incorporating Your Mail
inc Appendix A Scan Line Formats
incorporating 5 Incorporating Your Mail
incorporating 5 Incorporating Your Mail
index 15.1.1 swish++
index++ 15.1.1 swish++
info Preface
info 4 Using This Manual
info 4 Using This Manual
inline attachments 6.2 Viewing Attachments
inline images 6.2 Viewing Attachments
inserting messages 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
inserting messages 9.3 Inserting Messages
install-mh 2 Getting Started
interrupting 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
introduction 3 Tour Through MH-E
italics, showing 6.1 Viewing Your Mail

J
Jim Larus Appendix D History of MH-E
Jim Larus D.2 From Jim Larus
junk mail 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
junk mail 19 Dealing With Junk Mail

K
key names 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
key server 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
keychain 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
killing draft 9.10 Killing the Draft

L
Larus, Jim Appendix D History of MH-E
Larus, Jim D.2 From Jim Larus
Letter > Check Recipient’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Compose Compressed tar (MH)...’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Compose Forward...’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Compose Get File (MH)...’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Compose Insertion...’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Insert a Message...’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Insert Signature’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Kill This Draft’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Pull in All Compositions (MH)’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Pull in All Compositions (MML)’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Revert to Non-MIME Edit (MH)’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Send This Draft’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Split Current Line’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter > Yank Current Message’ menu item 9 Editing a Draft
Letter’ menu 9 Editing a Draft
Letter’ menu 13 The Menu Bar
Letter menu 13 The Menu Bar
limits 17 Limiting Display
links 6.3 HTML
links, following 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
lpr 6.6 Printing Your Mail
lynx 6.3 HTML

M
Mail mode 8.1 Composing
Mail-Followup-To’ header field 9.1 Editing the Message
Mail-Followup-To’ header field 11 Identities
Mail-Reply-To’ header field 9.1 Editing the Message
Mailer-Daemon 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages
mailing lists C.2 MH-E Mailing Lists
mailing lists, reading Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
mairix 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches
mairix 15.1.3 mairix
manual C.4 Getting MH-E
mark 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
mark 18 Using Sequences
Marshall Rose 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mbox-style folder 3.4 Leaving MH-E
media types 9.6 Adding Attachments
menu bar 13 The Menu Bar
menu item, ‘Folder > Incorporate New Mail 5 Incorporating Your Mail
menu item, ‘Folder > List Folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Folder > Pack Folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Folder > Quit MH-E 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Folder > Rescan Folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Folder > Search... 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Folder > Sort Folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Folder > Toggle Show/Folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Folder > View New Messages 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Folder > Visit a Folder... 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Identity > Customize Identities 11 Identities
menu item, ‘Identity > Insert Auto Fields 11 Identities
menu item, ‘Identity > Save as Default 11 Identities
menu item, ‘Identity > Set Default for Session 11 Identities
menu item, ‘Letter > Check Recipient 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Compose Compressed tar (MH)... 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Compose Forward... 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Compose Get File (MH)... 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Compose Insertion... 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Insert a Message... 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Insert Signature 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Kill This Draft 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Pull in All Compositions (MH) 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Pull in All Compositions (MML) 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Revert to Non-MIME Edit (MH) 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Send This Draft 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Split Current Line 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Letter > Yank Current Message 9 Editing a Draft
menu item, ‘Message > Burst Digest Message 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Compose a New Message 8 Sending Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Copy Message to Folder... 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Message > Delete Message 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Edit Message Again 8 Sending Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Execute Delete/Refile 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Message > Forward Message... 8 Sending Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Go to First Message 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Go to Last Message 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Go to Message by Number... 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Modify Message 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Next Message 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Pipe Message to Command... 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Previous Message 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Print Message 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Re-edit a Bounced Message 8 Sending Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Redistribute Message... 8 Sending Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Refile Message 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Message > Reply to Message... 8 Sending Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Show Message 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Show Message with Header 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Show Message with Preferred Alternative 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Undo Delete/Refile 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu item, ‘Message > Unpack Uuencoded Message... 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Message > Write Message to File... 6 Reading Your Mail
menu item, ‘Search > Perform Search 15 Searching Through Messages
menu item, ‘Search > Search with pick 15 Searching Through Messages
menu item, ‘Sequence > Add Message to Sequence... 18 Using Sequences
menu item, ‘Sequence > Delete Message from Sequence... 18 Using Sequences
menu item, ‘Sequence > Delete Sequence... 18 Using Sequences
menu item, ‘Sequence > List Sequences for Message 18 Using Sequences
menu item, ‘Sequence > List Sequences in Folder... 18 Using Sequences
menu item, ‘Sequence > Narrow to Sequence... 18 Using Sequences
menu item, ‘Sequence > Narrow to Subject Sequence 17 Limiting Display
menu item, ‘Sequence > Narrow to Tick Sequence 17 Limiting Display
menu item, ‘Sequence > Narrow to Tick Sequence 18 Using Sequences
menu item, ‘Sequence > Toggle Tick Mark 18 Using Sequences
menu item, ‘Sequence > Widen from Sequence 17 Limiting Display
menu item, ‘Sequence > Widen from Sequence 18 Using Sequences
menu, ‘Folder 5 Incorporating Your Mail
menu, ‘Folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu, Folder 13 The Menu Bar
menu, ‘Folder 13 The Menu Bar
menu, ‘Identity 11 Identities
menu, Identity 11 Identities
menu, Identity 13 The Menu Bar
menu, ‘Identity 13 The Menu Bar
menu, ‘Letter 9 Editing a Draft
menu, Letter 13 The Menu Bar
menu, ‘Letter 13 The Menu Bar
menu, ‘Message 6 Reading Your Mail
menu, ‘Message 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
menu, ‘Message 8 Sending Mail
menu, Message 13 The Menu Bar
menu, ‘Message 13 The Menu Bar
menu, Search 13 The Menu Bar
menu, ‘Search 13 The Menu Bar
menu, ‘Search 15 Searching Through Messages
menu, Sequence 13 The Menu Bar
menu, ‘Sequence 13 The Menu Bar
menu, ‘Sequence 18 Using Sequences
Message > Burst Digest Message’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Compose a New Message’ menu item 8 Sending Mail
Message > Copy Message to Folder...’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Message > Delete Message’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Edit Message Again’ menu item 8 Sending Mail
Message > Execute Delete/Refile’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Message > Forward Message...’ menu item 8 Sending Mail
Message > Go to First Message’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Go to Last Message’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Go to Message by Number...’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Modify Message’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Next Message’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Pipe Message to Command...’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Previous Message’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Print Message’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Re-edit a Bounced Message’ menu item 8 Sending Mail
Message > Redistribute Message...’ menu item 8 Sending Mail
Message > Refile Message’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Message > Reply to Message...’ menu item 8 Sending Mail
Message > Show Message’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Show Message with Header’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Show Message with Preferred Alternative’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Undo Delete/Refile’ menu item 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Message > Unpack Uuencoded Message...’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
Message > Write Message to File...’ menu item 6 Reading Your Mail
message abbreviations 4.2 Ranges
Message’ menu 6 Reading Your Mail
Message’ menu 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Message’ menu 8 Sending Mail
Message’ menu 13 The Menu Bar
Message menu 13 The Menu Bar
message numbers Appendix A Scan Line Formats
message ranges 4.2 Ranges
MH & nmh - Email for Users & Programmers Preface
MH book Preface
MH book 2 Getting Started
MH commands 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
MH commands, ali Loading Aliases
MH commands, burst 6.4 Digests
MH commands, dist 8.4 Redistributing Your Mail
MH commands, flists 12 The Speedbar
MH commands, folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
MH commands, forw 8.3 Forwarding Mail
MH commands, inc 3.2 Receiving Mail
MH commands, inc 5 Incorporating Your Mail
MH commands, inc Appendix A Scan Line Formats
MH commands, install-mh 2 Getting Started
MH commands, mark 18 Using Sequences
MH commands, mhbuild 9.6 Adding Attachments
MH commands, mhbuild Previewing Multimedia Messages
MH commands, mhl 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
MH commands, mhl 6.6 Printing Your Mail
MH commands, mhl 8.2 Replying to Mail
MH commands, mhn 6.2 Viewing Attachments
MH commands, mhn 9.6 Adding Attachments
MH commands, mhn Previewing Multimedia Messages
MH commands, mhparam 2 Getting Started
MH commands, mhshow 6.2 Viewing Attachments
MH commands, mhstore 6.2 Viewing Attachments
MH commands, packf 3.4 Leaving MH-E
MH commands, pick 15 Searching Through Messages
MH commands, pick 15 Searching Through Messages
MH commands, pick 15.1.5 pick
MH commands, pick 17 Limiting Display
MH commands, pick 18 Using Sequences
MH commands, rcvstore Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
MH commands, refile 3.3 Processing Mail
MH commands, refile 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
MH commands, repl 8.1 Composing
MH commands, repl 8.2 Replying to Mail
MH commands, scan 3.2 Receiving Mail
MH commands, scan 6 Reading Your Mail
MH commands, scan Appendix A Scan Line Formats
MH commands, scan Appendix A Scan Line Formats
MH commands, send 8.4 Redistributing Your Mail
MH commands, send 9.9 Sending a Message
MH commands, show 6.2 Viewing Attachments
MH commands, slocal Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
MH commands, sortm 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
MH commands, whom 9.8 Checking Recipients
mh’ customization group 4.1 Options
MH FAQ C.3 MH FAQ and Support
MH profile 2 Getting Started
MH profile component 2 Getting Started
MH profile component, ‘Aliasfile Loading Aliases
MH profile component, ‘Draft-Folder 2 Getting Started
MH profile component, ‘forw 8.3 Forwarding Mail
MH profile component, ‘Path 2 Getting Started
MH profile component, ‘Path 2 Getting Started
MH profile component, ‘Previous-Sequence 2 Getting Started
MH profile component, ‘Previous-Sequence 18 Using Sequences
MH profile component, ‘Previous-Sequence 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
MH profile component, ‘repl 8.2 Replying to Mail
MH profile component, ‘sortm 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
MH profile component, ‘Unseen-Sequence 2 Getting Started
MH profile component, ‘Unseen-Sequence 18 Using Sequences
MH profile component, ‘Unseen-Sequence Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
mh-alias’ customization group 10 Aliases
MH-E version 20 Miscellaneous Commands, Variables, and Buffers
MH-E, obtaining C.4 Getting MH-E
MH-E, versions 2 Getting Started
MH-E, versions Appendix D History of MH-E
MH-E-NEWS C.4 Getting MH-E
mh-folder’ customization group 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
MH-Folder mode 3.2 Receiving Mail
MH-Folder mode 3.3 Processing Mail
MH-Folder mode 6 Reading Your Mail
MH-Folder mode 6.8 Navigating
MH-Folder mode 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
MH-Folder mode 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
MH-Folder mode 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
MH-Folder mode 8.1 Composing
MH-Folder mode 13 The Menu Bar
MH-Folder mode 18 Using Sequences
MH-Folder Show mode 6.4 Digests
MH-Folder Show mode 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
mh-folder-selection’ customization group 4.3 Folder Selection
mh-identity’ customization group 11 Identities
mh-inc’ customization group 5 Incorporating Your Mail
mh-junk’ customization group 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-letter’ customization group 9 Editing a Draft
MH-Letter mode 3.1 Sending Mail
MH-Letter mode 8.1 Composing
MH-Letter mode 8.1 Composing
MH-Letter mode 8.2 Replying to Mail
MH-Letter mode 9 Editing a Draft
MH-Letter mode 10 Aliases
MH-Letter mode 13 The Menu Bar
mh-range’ customization group 4.2 Ranges
mh-scan-line-formats’ customization group Appendix A Scan Line Formats
mh-search’ customization group 15 Searching Through Messages
MH-Search mode 13 The Menu Bar
MH-Search mode 15 Searching Through Messages
mh-sending-mail’ customization group 8 Sending Mail
mh-sequences’ customization group 18 Using Sequences
mh-sequences’ customization group 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
mh-show’ customization group 6 Reading Your Mail
MH-Show mode 6 Reading Your Mail
MH-Show mode 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
MH-Show mode 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
MH-Show mode 8.2 Replying to Mail
mh-speedbar’ customization group 12 The Speedbar
mh-thread’ customization group 16 Viewing Message Threads
mh-tool-bar’ customization group 14 The Tool Bar
mhbuild 9.6 Adding Attachments
mhbuild Previewing Multimedia Messages
mhl 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
mhl 6.6 Printing Your Mail
mhl 8.2 Replying to Mail
mhl.reply 8.2 Replying to Mail
mhn 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mhn 9.6 Adding Attachments
mhn Previewing Multimedia Messages
mhparam 2 Getting Started
mhshow 6.2 Viewing Attachments
mhstore 6.2 Viewing Attachments
MIME 6.2 Viewing Attachments
MIME 9.6 Adding Attachments
MIME Meta Language (MML) 9.6 Adding Attachments
MIME, content description 9.6 Adding Attachments
MIME, ftp Including an FTP Reference
MIME, ftp Including tar Files
MIME, images Including Files
MIME, media types 9.6 Adding Attachments
MIME, sound Including Files
MIME, tar Including tar Files
MIME, video Including Files
minibuffer 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
mm-decode package 6.2 Viewing Attachments
MML 9.6 Adding Attachments
mode 3.1 Sending Mail
modes, Mail 8.1 Composing
modes, MH-Folder 3.2 Receiving Mail
modes, MH-Folder 3.3 Processing Mail
modes, MH-Folder 6 Reading Your Mail
modes, MH-Folder 6.8 Navigating
modes, MH-Folder 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
modes, MH-Folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
modes, MH-Folder 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
modes, MH-Folder 8.1 Composing
modes, MH-Folder 13 The Menu Bar
modes, MH-Folder 18 Using Sequences
modes, MH-Folder Show 6.4 Digests
modes, MH-Folder Show 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
modes, MH-Letter 3.1 Sending Mail
modes, MH-Letter 8.1 Composing
modes, MH-Letter 8.1 Composing
modes, MH-Letter 8.2 Replying to Mail
modes, MH-Letter 9 Editing a Draft
modes, MH-Letter 10 Aliases
modes, MH-Letter 13 The Menu Bar
modes, MH-Search 13 The Menu Bar
modes, MH-Search 15 Searching Through Messages
modes, MH-Show 6 Reading Your Mail
modes, MH-Show 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
modes, MH-Show 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
modes, MH-Show 8.2 Replying to Mail
moving between messages 6.8 Navigating
moving between messages 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
multimedia mail 6.2 Viewing Attachments
multimedia mail 9.6 Adding Attachments
multiple personalities 11 Identities

N
namazu 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches
namazu 15.1.4 namazu
navigation 6.8 Navigating
new mail 5 Incorporating Your Mail
news C.4 Getting MH-E
nil 4.1 Options
NIS, obtaining local aliases from Loading Aliases
nmh 2 Getting Started
normal hooks 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
notations, scan line Appendix A Scan Line Formats
notification of new mail 5 Incorporating Your Mail

O
obtaining MH-E C.4 Getting MH-E
off, option 4.1 Options
on, option 4.1 Options
online help 4 Using This Manual
OpenPGP 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
option, turning on and off 4.1 Options
options 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Organization’ header field 11 Identities

P
packf 3.4 Leaving MH-E
paragraphs, filling 9.1 Editing the Message
Path’ MH profile component 2 Getting Started
Path’ MH profile component 2 Getting Started
PGG 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
PGG 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
pgg’ customization group 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
pgg’ customization group 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
PGP 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
pick 15 Searching Through Messages
pick 15 Searching Through Messages
pick 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches
pick 15.1.5 pick
pick 17 Limiting Display
pick 18 Using Sequences
pipes 6.7 Files and Pipes
point 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
preface Preface
prefix argument 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
prefix characters 3.3 Processing Mail
Previous-Sequence’ MH profile component 2 Getting Started
Previous-Sequence’ MH profile component 18 Using Sequences
Previous-Sequence’ MH profile component 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
printing 6.6 Printing Your Mail
processing mail 3.3 Processing Mail
procmail 5 Incorporating Your Mail
procmail 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
procmail 15 Searching Through Messages
procmail Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
ps-print package 6.6 Printing Your Mail

Q
quitting 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
quitting 3.4 Leaving MH-E
quitting 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders

R
ranges 4.2 Ranges
rcvstore Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
re-editing drafts 8.5 Editing Old Drafts and Bounced Messages
reading mail 3.2 Receiving Mail
reading mail 6 Reading Your Mail
reading mail 6.9 Miscellaneous Commands and Options
README C.4 Getting MH-E
recipients, checking 9.8 Checking Recipients
redistributing 8.4 Redistributing Your Mail
refile 3.3 Processing Mail
refile 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
region 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
regular expressions, mh-alias-apropos Querying Aliases
regular expressions, mh-auto-fields-list 11 Identities
regular expressions, mh-invisible-header-fields 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
regular expressions, scan line formats Appendix A Scan Line Formats
Reid, Brian Appendix D History of MH-E
Reid, Brian D.1 From Brian Reid
release notes C.4 Getting MH-E
renaming folders 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
repl 8.1 Composing
repl 8.2 Replying to Mail
repl’ MH profile component 8.2 Replying to Mail
Reply-To’ header field 9.1 Editing the Message
replying 8.2 Replying to Mail
replying to messages 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
RFC 2047, decoding Appendix A Scan Line Formats
RFC 3156 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
RFC 3156 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
root, in threads 16 Viewing Message Threads

S
sa-learn SpamAssassin
saving attachments 6.2 Viewing Attachments
scan 3.2 Receiving Mail
scan 6 Reading Your Mail
scan Appendix A Scan Line Formats
scan Appendix A Scan Line Formats
scan line formats Appendix A Scan Line Formats
scan line notations Appendix A Scan Line Formats
scan lines 6 Reading Your Mail
Search > Perform Search’ menu item 15 Searching Through Messages
Search > Search with pick’ menu item 15 Searching Through Messages
Search’ menu 13 The Menu Bar
Search menu 13 The Menu Bar
Search’ menu 15 Searching Through Messages
searching 15 Searching Through Messages
security 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
send 8.4 Redistributing Your Mail
send 9.9 Sending a Message
sending mail 3.1 Sending Mail
sending mail 8 Sending Mail
sending mail 8.1 Composing
sending mail 9.9 Sending a Message
sending mail 9.9 Sending a Message
Sequence > Add Message to Sequence...’ menu item 18 Using Sequences
Sequence > Delete Message from Sequence...’ menu item 18 Using Sequences
Sequence > Delete Sequence...’ menu item 18 Using Sequences
Sequence > List Sequences for Message’ menu item 18 Using Sequences
Sequence > List Sequences in Folder...’ menu item 18 Using Sequences
Sequence > Narrow to Sequence...’ menu item 18 Using Sequences
Sequence > Narrow to Subject Sequence’ menu item 17 Limiting Display
Sequence > Narrow to Tick Sequence’ menu item 17 Limiting Display
Sequence > Narrow to Tick Sequence’ menu item 18 Using Sequences
Sequence > Toggle Tick Mark’ menu item 18 Using Sequences
Sequence > Widen from Sequence’ menu item 17 Limiting Display
Sequence > Widen from Sequence’ menu item 18 Using Sequences
Sequence’ menu 13 The Menu Bar
Sequence menu 13 The Menu Bar
Sequence’ menu 18 Using Sequences
sequence, ‘cur 18 Using Sequences
sequence, ‘cur 18 Using Sequences
sequence, ‘cur 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
sequence, ‘Previous-Sequence 18 Using Sequences
sequence, ‘Previous-Sequence 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
sequence, ‘tick 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
sequence, ‘tick 17 Limiting Display
sequence, ‘tick 18 Using Sequences
sequence, ‘tick 18 Using Sequences
sequence, ‘unseen 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
sequence, ‘Unseen-Sequence 18 Using Sequences
sequences 18 Using Sequences
setting options 4.1 Options
shar 6.7 Files and Pipes
shell commands 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
show 6.2 Viewing Attachments
shr 6.3 HTML
siblings, in threads 16 Viewing Message Threads
signature 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
signature 11 Identities
signature separator 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
signature separator 9.4 Inserting Your Signature
signed messages 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
signed messages 6.5 Signed and Encrypted Messages
signing messages 9.7 Signing and Encrypting Messages
slocal Appendix B Reading Mailing Lists Effectively
smileys 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
sortm 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
sortm’ MH profile component 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
sound Including Files
SourceForge C.1 Bug Reports
SourceForge C.2 MH-E Mailing Lists
SourceForge Appendix D History of MH-E
spam 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
spam 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
spam filters, bogofilter 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
spam filters, bogofilter Bogofilter
spam filters, Spamassassin 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
spam filters, Spamassassin SpamAssassin
spam filters, SpamProbe 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
spam filters, SpamProbe SpamProbe
Spamassassin 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
Spamassassin SpamAssassin
spamc SpamAssassin
SpamProbe 19 Dealing With Junk Mail
SpamProbe SpamProbe
speedbar 12 The Speedbar
spell check 9.1 Editing the Message
spell check 9.9 Sending a Message
starting from command line 8 Sending Mail
Stephen Gildea Appendix D History of MH-E
Stephen Gildea D.3 From Stephen Gildea
Subject’ header field 9.1 Editing the Message
Subject’ header field Other Things You Can Do
supercite package 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
support C.3 MH FAQ and Support
swish++ 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches
swish++ 15.1.1 swish++
swish-e 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches
swish-e 15.1.2 swish
swish-e 15.1.2 swish

T
t 4.1 Options
tar Including tar Files
terms, Emacs 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
threading 16 Viewing Message Threads
tick’ sequence 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
tick’ sequence 17 Limiting Display
tick’ sequence 18 Using Sequences
tick’ sequence 18 Using Sequences
ticked messages, viewing 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
ticked messages, viewing 17 Limiting Display
ticking messages 18 Using Sequences
To’ header field 9.1 Editing the Message
tool bar 14 The Tool Bar
tour 3 Tour Through MH-E
trivial-cite package 9.2 Inserting Letter to Which You’re Replying
tutorial 3 Tour Through MH-E
typesetting 6.1 Viewing Your Mail

U
uncompface 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
underline, showing 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
undo effects of mh-mh-to-mime Previewing Multimedia Messages
undo effects of mh-mml-to-mime Previewing Multimedia Messages
undoing refiles and deletes 7 Organizing Your Mail with Folders
Unix commands 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Unix commands, compface 9.5 Inserting Your Picture
Unix commands, convert 6.1 Viewing Your Mail
Unix commands, Emacs Preface
Unix commands, Emacs 1 GNU Emacs Terms and Conventions
Unix commands, emacsclient 5 Incorporating Your Mail
Unix commands, file 9.6 Adding Attachments
Unix commands, ftp Including an FTP Reference
Unix commands, ftp Including tar Files
Unix commands, gnuclient 5 Incorporating Your Mail
Unix commands, grep 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches
Unix commands, grep 15.1.6 grep
Unix commands, index 15.1.1 swish++
Unix commands, index++ 15.1.1 swish++
Unix commands, lpr 6.6 Printing Your Mail
Unix commands, mairix 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches
Unix commands, mairix 15.1.3 mairix
Unix commands, namazu 15.1 Configuring Indexed Searches